Sie sind auf Seite 1von 494

Submission Prohibited

NEC Internal Use Only


-i-

iPASOLINK 1000

CHAPTER II OPERATION
CONTENTS
DOCUMENT WARRANTY................................................................................ i
1. REFERENCE .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document ...................................................
1.2 LCT Communication Interface..............................................................
1.2.1 Communications...............................................................................
1.2.2 Local Port Interface ..........................................................................
1.3 iPASOLINK Equipment Configuration .................................................

1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2

2. PREPARING WebLCT ........................................................................... 2-1


2.1 Hardware Requirements........................................................................
2.2 Software Requirements.........................................................................
2.3 Operating System Environment ...........................................................
2.3.1 Verify Internet Explorer.....................................................................
2.3.2 Verify TCP/IP Settings......................................................................
2.4 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software.................................
2.4.1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8..........................................................
2.4.2 Mozilla Firefox Version 3.6.x.........................................................

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-6
2-6
2-9

3. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .................................................................. 3-1


3.1 General....................................................................................................
3.2 System Configuration............................................................................
3.2.1 IDU with Antenna Direct Connection................................................
3.2.2 IDU HS/ HS with Antenna Direct Connection...................................
3.2.3 IDU HS/ Hybrid SD with Antenna Direct Connection .......................
3.2.4 IDU Twin-Path FD with Antenna Direct Connection.........................
3.2.5 IDU HS SD with Antenna Direct Connection....................................
3.2.6 The 2+0 Configuration......................................................................
3.2.7 IDU n-Way........................................................................................
3.2.8 1+0 XPIC with Antenna Direct Connection.......................................
3.2.9 1+1 XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection .....................
3.3 System Overview ...................................................................................
3.3.1 Features ...........................................................................................
3.3.2 IDU Block Diagram...........................................................................

NWD-118790-04E
December, 2011

3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- ii -

CONTENTS

3.3.3 ODU Block Diagram .........................................................................


3.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................
3.4.1 Overview ..........................................................................................
3.4.2 Baseband Interface ..........................................................................

3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7

3.4.2.1 LAN Interfaces [MC-M/GbE-A Card] ..................................................... 3-7


3.4.2.2 E1 Interface [16E1-A Card] ................................................................... 3-7
3.4.2.3 STM-1 Interface [STM1-A Card]............................................................ 3-7

3.4.3 ODU Interface [MODEM-A Card] ..................................................... 3-8


3.4.4 DCN Interface................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.4.1
3.4.4.2
3.4.4.3
3.4.4.4

LCT Interface [MC-M Card] ................................................................... 3-8


NMS Interface [TERM-M Card] ............................................................. 3-8
NE1 Interface [TERM-M Card] .............................................................. 3-8
NE2 (RS485) Interface [AUX-A Card] ................................................... 3-8

3.4.5 Other Interfaces................................................................................ 3-9


3.4.5.1
3.4.5.2
3.4.5.3
3.4.5.4
3.4.5.5

ALM/SC/CLK [MC-M Card] ................................................................... 3-9


MEM [MC-M Card] ................................................................................ 3-9
Other Features on MC-M Card.............................................................. 3-9
ALM/EOW/NE2 [AUX-A Card]............................................................... 3-9
SC [TERM-M Card] ............................................................................... 3-9

3.5 IDU and System Performances........................................................... 3-10


3.5.1 General........................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.1 Environmental Conditions ................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.2 Power Consumption and Sizes ........................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.3 Others.................................................................................................. 3-10

3.5.2 IDU Performances.......................................................................... 3-11


3.5.2.1 Transmission Capacity and Channel Spacing..................................... 3-11
3.5.2.2 Interconnecting Cables........................................................................ 3-11
3.5.2.3 Power Line Requirement..................................................................... 3-11

3.5.3 Functional Overview....................................................................... 3-12


3.5.3.1 Native IP and Native TDM................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.2 Adaptive Modulation (AMR) ................................................................ 3-12
3.5.3.3 Radio Protection Method..................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.4 E1 Ring Protection .............................................................................. 3-12
3.5.3.5 ETH Functions..................................................................................... 3-12
3.5.3.6 XPIC (CCDP) Function........................................................................ 3-13
3.5.3.7 AMR, 1+1 and XPIC Combination....................................................... 3-13
3.5.3.8 DXC (E1 Crossconnect) Capacity ....................................................... 3-13
3.5.3.9 Card Redundancy ............................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3.10 User Authentication ........................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3.11 Loopback........................................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3.12 Modern TX Output Control ................................................................ 3-14
3.5.3.13 Performance Monitoring (PMON) / Metering..................................... 3-14
3.5.3.14 Multi Service Engine [MSE-A Card] .................................................. 3-15

4. NE SETUP .............................................................................................. 4-1


4.1 Login, Logout and Exit ..........................................................................
4.1.1 Log In to NE .....................................................................................
4.1.2 Log Out from NE ..............................................................................
4.1.3 Exit WebLCT ....................................................................................

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

4-1
4-1
4-4
4-5

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
CONTENTS

- iii -

4.2 WebLCT Main Window .......................................................................... 4-6


4.3 Setup Software License ........................................................................ 4-9
4.3.1 Import Software License Key ........................................................... 4-9
4.3.2 Radio Capacity Setting................................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 SFP Port License Setting ............................................................... 4-14
4.4 User Management ................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.1.1 Access Level ....................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.1.2 User Group.......................................................................................... 4-16

4.4.2 User Access Levels........................................................................ 4-17


4.4.3 Default User Account ..................................................................... 4-21
4.4.4 User Account.................................................................................. 4-21
4.4.4.1
4.4.4.2
4.4.4.3
4.4.4.4

Login User List .................................................................................... 4-22


User Authentication Configuration....................................................... 4-22
User Account Management................................................................. 4-26
User Group Profile Configuration ........................................................ 4-36

4.5 Security Management.......................................................................... 4-43


4.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-43
4.5.2 Service Status Setting .................................................................... 4-52
4.5.2.1
4.5.2.2
4.5.2.3
4.5.2.4
4.5.2.5
4.5.2.6
4.5.2.7
4.5.2.8
4.5.2.9

SNMP .................................................................................................. 4-55


SNMP Community............................................................................... 4-57
SNMP Trap Entry ................................................................................ 4-63
NTP ..................................................................................................... 4-70
NTP Server Address ........................................................................... 4-73
FTP...................................................................................................... 4-78
SFTP ................................................................................................... 4-81
HTTP ................................................................................................... 4-83
HTTPS................................................................................................. 4-85

4.5.3 RADIUS Setting.............................................................................. 4-87


4.6 Register NE Configuration .................................................................. 4-94
4.6.1 Easy Setup Wizard......................................................................... 4-94
4.6.1.1
4.6.1.2
4.6.1.3
4.6.1.4
4.6.1.5
4.6.1.6
4.6.1.7

Easy Setup .......................................................................................... 4-94


MODEM Setup .................................................................................. 4-106
AMR Setup ........................................................................................ 4-109
Management Setup ........................................................................... 4-114
TDM Setup ........................................................................................ 4-116
ETH Setup......................................................................................... 4-119
PWE Setup........................................................................................ 4-123

4.6.2 Equipment Setup.......................................................................... 4-128


4.6.2.1
4.6.2.2
4.6.2.3
4.6.2.4

Equipment Configuration................................................................... 4-129


Radio Configuration........................................................................... 4-141
AMR Configuration ............................................................................ 4-146
Network Management Configuration................................................. 4-150

5. PROVISIONING ...................................................................................... 5-1


5.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Set MODEM Function ............................................................................ 5-2
5.2.1 Set MODEM Ports............................................................................ 5-2

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- iv -

CONTENTS

5.2.2 Set Radio Switch Parameters .......................................................... 5-4


5.2.3 Set TX Power Parameters................................................................ 5-7
5.2.3.1 ATPC Mode........................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3.2 MTPC Mode .......................................................................................... 5-9

5.2.4 Set ALM Mode................................................................................


5.2.5 Set XPIC.........................................................................................
5.2.6 Set AMR .........................................................................................
5.3 Set ETH Function .................................................................................
5.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................
5.3.2 Bridge Setting.................................................................................
5.3.3 ETH Port Setting ............................................................................
5.3.4 VLAN Setting..................................................................................
5.3.4.1
5.3.4.2
5.3.4.3
5.3.4.4

5-11
5-13
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-20
5-22
5-24

VLAN List ............................................................................................ 5-24


Modify VLAN Service Name................................................................ 5-26
Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID ..................................................................... 5-28
VLAN Setting....................................................................................... 5-30

5.3.5 FDB Setting .................................................................................... 5-41


5.3.5.1 FDB Setting ......................................................................................... 5-41
5.3.5.2 Static Entry Setting.............................................................................. 5-47

5.3.6 ETH OAM Setting........................................................................... 5-53


5.3.6.1 OAM MEG Setting............................................................................... 5-53
5.3.6.2 OAM MEP Setting ............................................................................... 5-58
5.3.6.3 OAM MIP Setting................................................................................. 5-67

5.3.7 RSTP Setting.................................................................................. 5-75


5.3.7.1 Modify RSTP Port................................................................................ 5-75
5.3.7.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter ....................................................... 5-78

5.3.8 ERP Setting.................................................................................... 5-80


5.3.9 Link Aggregation ............................................................................ 5-88
5.3.9.1 Add Link Aggregation .......................................................................... 5-88
5.3.9.2 Modify LAG Registration ..................................................................... 5-91
5.3.9.3 Delete LAG Registration...................................................................... 5-94

5.3.10 QoS/Classification Setting............................................................ 5-96


5.3.10.1
5.3.10.2
5.3.10.3
5.3.10.4

Classification Setting (Equipment Based QoS Mode) ....................... 5-97


Classification Setting (Port Based QoS Mode)................................ 5-106
Ingress Setting ................................................................................ 5-113
Port Setting Tab .............................................................................. 5-126

5.3.11 Filter Settings ............................................................................. 5-132


5.3.11.1 Filter List.......................................................................................... 5-132
5.3.11.2 Profile List........................................................................................ 5-140
5.3.11.3 Port Filter Settings........................................................................... 5-145

5.3.12 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting........................................... 5-147


5.3.13 Port Isolate Setting ..................................................................... 5-149
5.3.14 LLF Setting ................................................................................. 5-151
5.3.14.1 Add LLF Group................................................................................ 5-151
5.3.14.2 Modify LLF Group............................................................................ 5-153
5.3.14.3 Delete LLF Group............................................................................ 5-155

5.3.15 Broadcast Storm Control Setting................................................ 5-157


5.4 Configure Crossconnection.............................................................. 5-160
5.4.1 E1 Port Setting ............................................................................. 5-160

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
CONTENTS

-v-

5.4.2 STM-1 Port Setting....................................................................... 5-163


5.4.3 Cross Connect Setting ................................................................. 5-169
5.4.3.1 Add Cross Connect Assignment ....................................................... 5-171
5.4.3.2 Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment.......................................... 5-176
5.4.3.3 Delete Cross Connect Assignment ................................................... 5-178

5.5 Set PWE Function ..............................................................................


5.5.1 Add New PWE..............................................................................
5.5.2 Modify PWE..................................................................................
5.5.3 Delete PWE..................................................................................
5.6 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization.....................................
5.6.1 Set Equipment Clock....................................................................
5.6.2 Set EXT Clock ..............................................................................
5.7 Assign STM-1 (Through) Port for V.11/OW......................................
5.7.1 V.11/SC Setting............................................................................

5-181
5-181
5-186
5-190
5-192
5-192
5-196
5-200
5-200

5.7.1.1 Assign SC Channel Usage................................................................ 5-200


5.7.1.2 Set for MODEM ................................................................................. 5-202
5.7.1.3 Set for STM1-A.................................................................................. 5-204

5.7.2 Assign V.11 Directional Setting .................................................... 5-207


5.7.3 Assign Orderwire Setting.............................................................. 5-209
5.7.3.1 SW GRP1 (MODEM)......................................................................... 5-209
5.7.3.2 AUX-A ............................................................................................... 5-211

5.8 Specify Relay Alarm Mappings.........................................................


5.8.1 Relay Control Setting ...................................................................
5.8.2 Cluster Alarm Setting ...................................................................
5.9 Configure Alarm/AIS Setting.............................................................
5.9.1 Correlation Settings......................................................................
5.9.2 Alarm Severity Setting..................................................................
5.9.3 AIS Setting ...................................................................................
5.9.4 BER Threshold Setting.................................................................

5-213
5-215
5-218
5-220
5-220
5-222
5-225
5-227

5.9.4.1 Switch Group 1 (MODEM)................................................................. 5-227


5.9.4.2 STM1-A ............................................................................................. 5-229

5.10 Assign PMON/RMON Settings ........................................................ 5-231


5.10.1 PMON Threshold Setting ........................................................... 5-231
5.10.1.1 MODEM / SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab.................................................. 5-232
5.10.1.2 APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab ................................................................. 5-235
5.10.1.3 16E1-A (Slot No.) Tab ..................................................................... 5-241

5.10.2 PMON Other............................................................................... 5-244


5.10.3 RMON Threshold Setting ........................................................... 5-246
5.10.4 RMON Other .............................................................................. 5-249
5.10.4.1 Add VLAN Counter.......................................................................... 5-249
5.10.4.2 Delete VLAN Counter...................................................................... 5-251

5.11 AUX Setting ...................................................................................... 5-253


5.11.1 AUX Input Setting....................................................................... 5-253
5.11.2 AUX Output Setting .................................................................... 5-262

6. ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS ......................................................... 6-1

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- vi -/END

This page is intentionally left blank.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
DOCUMENT WARRANTY

-i-

DOCUMENT WARRANTY

1. The information in this document is subject to change without prior notice.


2. Screenshots of WebLCT provided in this document are examples. Screenshot
samples in this document should be the latest as of issuing time, however, their
appearances may vary according to configurations, operation modes and specified
parameters of the equipment, WebLCT applications release version, etc.
3. This document is provided on the assumption that the targeted users have skills and
knowledge of restrictions and precautions to operate the equivalent equipment. Refer
to the equipment manual for details.

NWD-118790-04E
December, 2011

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
- ii -/END

DOCUMENT WARRANTY

This page is intentionally left blank.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
REFERENCE

1-1

1. REFERENCE
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document
Following conventions are used throughout this document:

Style

Description

Examples:

Italic

Indicates a related document title/name.

Refer to iPASOLINK Operation


Manual for details

Bold

Menus and menu items

The Overall window appears.

Indications of parameters and buttons displayed


on the user interface
Names of items in the computer display
File names and directory names
(arrow)

Indicates transition of screens and/or menu items.

Select System Login/Logout.

< item >

A command variable to be entered, which requires


the users choice or definition. Commonly used to
prompt the user to enter a password.

< password >

Initial Caps

Indicates a keypad name using an uppercase for


its first letter.

Press Enter key.

1.2 LCT Communication Interface


1.2.1 Communications
iPASOLINK 1000 provides WebLCT as the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) that is a
convenient tool to install and maintain the equipment. WebLCT uses the GUI method
on WEB browser. In addition, this tool enables a remote connection.
Since using the method of WEB browser, there is no application software to install.
However, to operate iPASOLINK via WebLCT, license keys that are prepared
according to the contract and equipment version should be installed.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
1-2/END

REFERENCE

1.2.2 Local Port Interface


The LCT Port is provided on the equipment front:

NOTE: Enabled LCT Port is on the active MC-M.

(to LCT port)

LAN CABLE
(10/100BASE-TX)

Figure 1-1 LCT Port

Connect the LAN Port on PC and LCT Port on front of the equipment (MC-M Card
on the active side) using a LAN Cable. Following are the specifications of LAN Port/
Cable:
10/100BASE-TX
RJ45

1.3 iPASOLINK Equipment Configuration


Following types of configurations are available by a single iPASOLINK 1000 IDU:
12-Way Nodal [Non-Protected (1+0)]
Protected (1+1) with hot standby, space diversity, twin path with hitless switch.
Six pairs of XPIC
Ethernet-ring

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT

2-1

2. PREPARING WebLCT
2.1 Hardware Requirements
Component

For Windows XP

For Windows Vista

For Windows 7

CPU

Pentium M 1.6 GHz

Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz

Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz

RAM

512 MB or greater

1 GB or greater

1 GB or greater

HDD

40 GB or greater

40 GB or greater

40 GB or greater

Display

Color LCD (1024 768)

Color LCD (1024 768)

Color LCD (1024 768)

LAN Port

10/100BASE-T(X)

10/100BASE-T(X)

10/100BASE-T(X)

USB Port

2.2 Software Requirements


Item

Requirement

Supported Operating System

Windows XP [English Version]


Windows Vista [English Version]
Windows 7 [English Version]

Browsing Software

Microsoft Internet Explorer 8


Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Mozilla Firefox Version 3.6 or later

2.3 Operating System Environment


Check if your PC satisfies the conditions below:
Internet Explorer is installed
TCP/IP Protocol is properly set.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-2

PREPARING WebLCT

2.3.1 Verify Internet Explorer


Confirm that the Internet Explorer is installed on the PC for WebLCT. Following are
examples of Windows XP:

Procedure 2-1

Verify Internet Explorer

Click start button, then select:


All Programs Internet Explorer [Start menu] or
Programs Internet Explorer [Classic Start menu]

Programs

[Start menu]

[Classic Start menu]

Figure 2-1 Windows Start Menu

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT

2-3

2.3.2 Verify TCP/IP Settings


An IP Address of the PC for WebLCT will be automatically detected at and retrieved
from DHCP Server of the NE.

Procedure 2-2

Set/Verify TCP/P Settings

Set the IP Address that is automatically retrieved:


1. Log on to the Operating System (Windows) as an Administrator.
2. From the start menu of the Windows, select Control Panel. [For the Classic
Start menu, select Settings Control Panel.] The Control Panel appears.
3. Double-click the Network Connections icon.

Figure 2-2 Windows Control Panel

The Network Connections option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-4

PREPARING WebLCT

4. Right-click on the Local Area Connection to show the pop-up menu, and select

Properties.

Figure 2-3 Network Connections Option Window

The Local Area Connection Properties option window appears.


5. Click on the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) to select, and click the Properties

button.

Properties button

Figure 2-4 Local Area Connection Properties Option Window

The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT

2-5

6. Verify the following:

Figure 2-5 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Option Window

Obtain an IP address automatically is selected.


Obtain DNS server address automatically is selected.
7. When verified, click the OK button. The Local Area Connection Properties

option window appears.


8. Click the OK button to proceed.
9. Close the Network Connections option window when necessary.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-6

PREPARING WebLCT

2.4 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software


Following are the recommended settings for the browsing software (browsers)
available to operate LCT:

2.4.1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8


Procedure 2-3

Set Tabbed Browsing Option

Tabbed Browsing option is recommended.


1. Start up the Internet Explorer 8.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Internet Options.

Figure 2-6 Internet Explorer Tools Menu

The Internet Options appears.


3. On the General tab, click Settings
under Tabs option.

The Tabbed Browsing Settings


option window appears.
Figure 2-7 Internet Options General

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT

2-7

4. Select Always open pop-ups in a new tab, then click the OK button.

Figure 2-8 Tabbed Browsing Settings Option Window

Proceed to Procedure 2-4.


Procedure 2-4

Set Security Options

1. Click Security tab to open the security options.


2. Click Custom level button.

Custom level button

Figure 2-9 Internet Options Security

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-8

PREPARING WebLCT

Security Settings Internet Zone option window appears.


3. Select Enable for Downloads Automatic prompting for file downloads

option.

Figure 2-10 Internet Options Security Settings Internet Zone


4. Click the OK button.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PREPARING WebLCT

2-9

2.4.2 Mozilla Firefox Version 3.6.x


Procedure 2-5

Customize Firefox

1. Start up the Firefox 3.6.x.


2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Options.

Figure 2-11 Firefox Tools Menu

The Options box appears.


3. Select Always ask me where to save files, then click the OK button.

Figure 2-12 Options General

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
2-10/END

PREPARING WebLCT

This page is intentionally left blank.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-1

3. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3.1 General
iPASOLINK 1000 is the equipment designed to converge the high density nodal
applications, such as the cross-connections of 12 links, aggregation/distribution of
multiple-links ring nodes and the large capacity D/I repeater applications, etc.,
supporting the versatile transportations of both native TDM and native Ethernet
traffics, as well as the link and each transportation levels independent ring
protections.
Along with iPASOLINK 200 and iPASOLINK 400, iPASOLINK 1000 provides up
to 460 Mbps transmission capacity per radio link and advanced modulation scheme
operating in 6, 7, 8. 10, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 28, 32, 38 or 42 GHz band. Furthermore,
iPASOLINK 1000 is available to support the high-speed interfaces, such as 10GbE
and CWDM for converged mobile and fixed broadband.
The iPASOLINK 1000 consists of the antennas, Outdoor Units (ODU) and the 19inch 3U size Indoor Unit (IDU), owing its high performance and reliability in a small
form factor to NECs rigid TQC activities and vast experience in the wired and
wireless communication fields.
The iPASOLINK 1000 provides fourteen front accessible universal-card slots that
accommodate a wide range of interface modules satisfying various D/I and/or
topology requirements. The iPASOLINK 1000 can configure up to twelve 1+0, six
1+1 twin-path, hot standby and diversity radio link arrangements.
In addition, using NECs most advanced cross polarization interface canceling
techniques, transmission capacity of up to 920 Mbps is supported utilizing the same
radio frequency channel.
The iPASOLINK 1000 enables these without any header suppression/compression of
packet data.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-2

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.2 System Configuration


The system consists of the MDP-400MB-1BB Modulator-Demodulator [Indoor Unit
(IDU)] and TRP-( )G-1/1D Transmitter-Receiver [Outdoor Unit (ODU)], Hybrid
Combiner/Divider and the antenna.
NOTE: The Combiner/Divider is used in (1+1) single antenna configuration of the
ODU Type directly mounting the antenna.

3.2.1 IDU with Antenna Direct Connection


IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

MD1

I/F Cable

IDU

f1
ODU

ODU

I/F Cable

DATA
IN/OUT

MD1

f1

3.2.2 IDU HS/ HS with Antenna Direct Connection


IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
MD1
MD2

I/F Cable

ODU (Working)
HYB
ODU (Standby)

f1
f1

ODU (Working)
HYB
ODU (Standby)

I/F Cable

IDU
MD1

DATA
IN/OUT

MD2
I/F Cable

3.2.3 IDU HS/ Hybrid SD with Antenna Direct Connection


IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
MD1
MD2

I/F Cable

ODU (Working)
HYB
ODU (Standby)

f1
ODU (Working)

f1

I/F Cable

IDU
MD1

f1

DATA
IN/OUT

MD2
ODU (Standby)

I/F Cable

3.2.4 IDU Twin-Path FD with Antenna Direct Connection


IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
MD1
MD2

I/F Cable

ODU (Working)
HYB
ODU (Standby)

f1
f2
f1
f2

ODU (Working)
HYB
ODU (Standby)

I/F Cable

IDU
MD1
MD2

DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable

3.2.5 IDU HS SD with Antenna Direct Connection


IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
MD1

f1
ODU (Working)

f1

ODU (Working)

I/F Cable

MD2

MD2
I/F Cable

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

IDU
MD1

ODU (Standby)

ODU (Standby)

DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-3

3.2.6 The 2+0 Configuration


IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
MD1

f1
ODU (Working)

ODU (Working)

f1

HYB

IDU

I/F Cable

MD1

MD2
I/F Cable

ODU (Standby)

DATA
IN/OUT

HYB

f1

MD2
ODU (Standby)

f1

I/F Cable

3.2.7 IDU n-Way


n = Up to 12
IDU
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
MD1

f1
ODU (Working)

ODU (Working)

HYB

I/F Cable

IDU

DATA
IN/OUT

IDU

DATA
IN/OUT

f1

f1
MDn

I/F Cable

ODU (Standby)

ODU (Standby)
f1

I/F Cable

n Way

3.2.8 1+0 XPIC with Antenna Direct Connection


IDU
MD
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable

HYB

ODU

V(H)
f1
f1

HYB
MD

I/F Cable

ODU

V(H)
ODU

IDU
MD

H(V)

ODU

DATA
IN/OUT

HYB

HYB

f1
f1
H(V)

I/F Cable

I/F Cable

MD

XI/F Cable

XI/F Cable

3.2.9 1+1 XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection


IDU
MD
DATA
IN/OUT

I/F Cable
XI/F Cable

HYB

ODU
HYB

MD

ODU

MD

ODU
HYB

MD

NWD-118790-04E

I/F Cable

V(H)
f1
f1

ODU

V(H)
ODU

MD

HYB XI/F Cable

f1
f1
H(V)

IDU
I/F Cable

H(V)

MD

ODU

HYB

ODU

DATA
IN/OUT

MD

HYB
ODU

I/F Cable

MD

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-4

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.3 System Overview


3.3.1 Features
ODU-IDU Separate Mounting Type using one coaxial cable only for connection.
Available to select the protection or non-protection system using common ODUs
and IDUs.
Flexible configurations for ODUs and antennas: mounting directly or remotely
for configurations of 1+0 (non redundant), 1+1 hot standby, 1+1 space diversity,
1+1 frequency diversity (Twin-Path), 1+0 XPIC, 1+1 XPIC, 2+0, and N way.
ACCP, ACAP, CCDP and configurations by merging these are available.
Compact size IDU on 19-inch rack.

Figure 3-1 IDU Appearance

Small and light-weight ODU that is easy to handle and install.

13-42 GHz ODU and


0.3 m Direct-Mount Antenna

6-11 GHz ODU

Figure 3-2 ODU Appearances

Wide temperature range operative ODU and IDU.


Nominal rating of input DC voltage: 48 V DC

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-5

3.3.2 IDU Block Diagram


#14
MODEM
16E1
STM-1
GbE
MSE
AUX

TDM Bus

#1

CWDM
Universal
Slots
Control Bus

Packet Bus

CPU

L2 SW

TDM SW

TERM

NMS

48 V
PS
48 V

Clock

Alarm
DSC
Clock

4 GbE
(SFP/RJ45)

PS

Main Card (Redundant)


Figure 3-3 IDU Block Diagram

3.3.3 ODU Block Diagram


TX first MIX
(depends on frequency band)
TX I/F

MIX

BPF

MIX

BPF

RF CKT
PA

DUP

MPX

TO/FROM
ANTENNA

TO/FROM
IDU
RX I/F

BPF

MIX

TX: 350 MHz


RX: 140 MHz

LNA

DC-DC CONV

LO

CTRL

Figure 3-4 ODU Block Diagram

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-6

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.4 Interfaces
3.4.1 Overview
Universal Card-Slots
ODU Interface (Modem)
GbE (10/100/1000BASE-X)
16 E1 TDM
STM-1 (up to 2 STM-1)
Multi Service Engine
AUX (DI - DO/ EXT ALM)

Universal Slot #1

Universal Slot #2

Universal Slot #3

Universal Slot #4

Universal Slot #5

Universal Slot #6

Universal Slot #7

Universal Slot #8

MAIN CARD 1

Main Card Slot #1

Universal Slot #9
Universal Slot #10
Universal Slot #11

FAN1

Main Card Slot #2


Universal Slot #12

Universal Slot #13

Universal Slot #14

PS 1

TERM

FAN2

PS Slot #2

Slots for fundamental cards that must be mounted.


Slot #

PS

Slots for option cards, which can be left vacant.


Power Supply
MC-M Card
LCT
USB

Ethernet (SFP) 3, 4
Ethernet (RJ45)
1, 2

Alarm,
Service Channel,
Clock

MC-M 1

MC-M2 (redundant option)

NMS

Power Supply 1

NE1

Power Supply 2 (redundant option)

Service Channel

Figure 3-5 IDU Interface Layout

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-7

3.4.2 Baseband Interface


iPASOLINK 1000 supports various interfaces specified by the ITU-T standards and
IEEE standards as listed below:

3.4.2.1 LAN Interfaces [MC-M/GbE-A Card]


Four ports (two SFP Ports and two RJ45 Ports) of LAN Interface per MC-M or GbEA Card are provided.
Interface:

2 1000BASE-SX/LX/CWDM [802.3]
2 10/100/1000BASE-T(X), auto/fixed

Signal Rate:

1.25 Gbps [1000BASE-SX/LX/T/CWDM]


125 Mbps [100BASE-TX]
10 Mbps [10BASE-T]

Connector:

LC [1000BASE-SX/LX/CWDM]
RJ45 [10/100/1000BASE-T(X)]

3.4.2.2 E1 Interface [16E1-A Card]


Interface:

HDB-3 [G.703]

Signal Rate:

16 E1 (2.048 Mbps)

Impedance:

75 ohms or 120 ohms (selectable)

Connector:

MDR68

3.4.2.3 STM-1 Interface [STM1-A Card]


STM-1 Interface Card provides two SFP interfaces. The second STM-1 Interface is
supported for APS (Automatic Protection Switching) function only.

NWD-118790-04E

Interface:

S-1.1/L-1,1 [G.957]
STM-1e [G.703]
CWDM

Signal Rate:

1 or 2 155.52 Mbps

Connector:

LC [S-1.1/L-1.1/CWDM]
DIN 1.0/2.3 [STM-1e]

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-8

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.4.3 ODU Interface [MODEM-A Card]


ODU Interface is a port connecting to/from IDU using a coaxial cable. Up to 12
connections (to 12 Universal Slots on IDU at maximum) can be added.
Connector:

TNC Female

3.4.4 DCN Interface


3.4.4.1 LCT Interface [MC-M Card]
iPASOLINK provides users the GUI environment through WEB browser, the Local
Craft Terminal (WebLCT), which is a convenient tool to install and maintain
iPASOLINK. This tool supports the remote connection as well.
Type:

10/100BASE-T(X)
DHCP Server Supported

Connector:

RJ45

3.4.4.2 NMS Interface [TERM-M Card]


This port is for connection with NMS Server through the network.
Type:

10/100BASE-T(X)

Connector:

RJ45

Protocols:

SNMPv1/v2c/v3, https, sftp

3.4.4.3 NE1 Interface [TERM-M Card]


The NE1 port is for a connection to/from other IDU(s).
Type:

10/100BASE-T(X)

Connector:

RJ45

3.4.4.4 NE2 (RS485) Interface [AUX-A Card]


Type:

Serial signal port for legacy equipment

Connector:

D-SUB 44-pin

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-9

3.4.5 Other Interfaces


3.4.5.1 ALM/SC/CLK [MC-M Card]
Connector:

one D-SUB 44-pin

Usage:
ALM:

two output ports

V-11-1:

one port [64 kbps async; co/contra direction selectable]

RS-232C-1:

one port [9.6 kbps async]

EXT CLK IN:

one port [2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbps; 75 or 120 ohms]

EXT CLK OUT:

one port [2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbps; 75 or 120 ohms]

3.4.5.2 MEM [MC-M Card]


Slot Type:

one USB

3.4.5.3 Other Features on MC-M Card


EOW:

one Engineering Orderwire outlet


[4-wire voice channel]

CALL:

one push button switch

(no designation):

equipped with buzzer

3.4.5.4 ALM/EOW/NE2 [AUX-A Card]


Connector:

one D-SUB 44-pin

Usage:
ALM:

four alarm output ports

Housekeeping:

six Control/Alarm input ports

EOW:

two ports (for back-to-back connection)

CALL OUT:

two ports

Buzzer IN:

two ports

NE2:

See 3.4.4.4 NE2 (RS485) Interface [AUX-A Card]

3.4.5.5 SC [TERM-M Card]


Connector:

one D-SUB 15-pin

Usage:

NWD-118790-04E

V-11-2:

one port [64 kbps async; co/contra direction selectable]

RS-232C-2:

one port [9.6 kbps async]

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-10

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.5 IDU and System Performances


3.5.1 General
3.5.1.1 Environmental Conditions
Temperature:
Operational:
Transportation:
Storage:

5 to +50 C (ETSI EN3000 19-1-3 Class 3.1E)


10 to +55 C
ETSI EN300019-1-2 Class 2.3
ETSI EN300019-1-1 Class 1.2

Humidity:
Intra-Station:
Transportation:
Storage:

up to 95% (at +50 C, no condensing)


ETSI EN300019-1-2 Class 2.3
ETSI EN300019-1-1 Class 1.2

3.5.1.2 Power Consumption and Sizes


Ref.
#

OBJECT

POWER
CONSUMPTION

DIMENSIONS
[W H D] mm

483 129 240

IDU
1

WEIGHT

NOTE

15 kg

The weight is approximated.

7.0 kg

Chassis (vacant slots)

40 W

300 22 220

0.7 kg

Main Card; Class 1 Product

MODEM-A

10 W

100 22 220

0.4 kg

ODU Interface

16E1-A

8W

100 22 220

0.4 kg

16 E1 Interface

STM1-A

8 W

100 22 220

0.4 kg

STM-1 Interface; Class 1 Product

GbE-A

8 W

100 22 220

0.4 kg

4GbE [2SFP + 2RJ45]; Class 1 Product

MSE-A

10 W

100 22 220

0.4 kg

Multi Service Engine for PWE

AUX-A

3W

100 22 220

0.4 kg

Auxiliary Card

CWDMFA

0W

100 22 210

0.4 kg

Class 1/1M Laser Product

10

CWDMFB

0W

100 22 210

0.4 kg

Class 1/1M Laser Product

11

FAN-M

6W

30 66 220

0.6 kg

FAN Unit

12

TERM-M

3W

100 22 220

0.2 kg

Term Card

13

PS-M

150 22 220

0.4 kg

Power Supply

MC-M

: The value does not include the power consumption of SFP.

3.5.1.3 Others
EMC:
Safety:

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Conforms to EN301489-4
Conforms to EN60950-1

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-11

3.5.2 IDU Performances


3.5.2.1 Transmission Capacity and Channel Spacing
CHANNEL SPACING

TRANSMISION
CAPACITY
[Physical layer maximum
throughput 64-byte VLAN
Tagged packet size]

*: 13.75 MHz;

7 MHz

14 MHz*

28 MHZ

QPSK

14 Mbps

28 Mbps

57 Mbps

114 Mbps

16 QAM

28 Mbps

57 Mbps

114 Mbps

230 Mbps

32 QAM

35 Mbps

71 Mbps

143 Mbps

287 Mbps

64 QAM

42 Mbps

85 Mbps

172 Mbps

345 Mbps

128 QAM

49 Mbps

99 Mbps

200 Mbps

402 Mbps

256 QAM

114 Mbps

229 Mbps

460 Mbps

56 MHz

: 27.5 MHz; : 55 MHz; : Channel Spacing at 18 GHz band

3.5.2.2 Interconnecting Cables


ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Connector Type

TNC Female

Cable Type

8D-FB-E or equivalent

Cable Length

Nominal 300 m at maximum

3.5.2.3 Power Line Requirement

NWD-118790-04E

Input Voltage Range:

48 V DC (40.5 to 57 V DC)
[conforms to EN300 132 2]

Connector:

10-pin, 3.81 mm pitch [1-178288-8]

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-12

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.5.3 Functional Overview


3.5.3.1 Native IP and Native TDM
MODEM has both native IP and native TDM signal processing circuits.

3.5.3.2 Adaptive Modulation (AMR)


6 modulation schemes changeable:

QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

3.5.3.3 Radio Protection Method


1+1 HS/HS, HS/SD, FD
HS: Hotstandby
SD: Space Diversity
FD: Frequency Diversity

3.5.3.4 E1 Ring Protection


E1 SNCP support

3.5.3.5 ETH Functions


Switching Capacity:

48 Gbps (non-blocking)

MAC Learning Table:

Independent VLAN Learning (VLAN + MAC)


up to 32 k (configurable)

VLAN:

802.1Q Port Based, Tag Based, Tunnel


802.1ad Port Based, Tag Based, Selective
Up to 4064 VLANs per equipment
MEF 9 Certified EPL, EVPL and ELAN
service support with L2CP Tunneling function

Jumbo Frame:

Supported (up to 9600 bytes)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-13

QoS:
Ingress:

Egress:

MEF/RFC4115 Compliant Policing (CIR, EIR,


CBS, EBS)
QoS Classification (VLAN CoS, IPv4 DSCP,
Pv6 DSCP, MPLS EXP, ETH Port, VLAN ID)
4/8 Class SP/D-WRR Queues
per-class rate configurable shaping
per-class configurable maximum burst length
shaping for strict priority queue
Hierarchical shaping (Port and Class)
WRED congestion avoidance and Weighted
Tail Drop

ETH OAM:

802.1ag Service OAM (CC/LB/LT), Y1731


Performance Monitoring (LM/DM)

Protection:

STP/RSTP, G.8032v2 ERPS

Link Aggregation:

Radio Link Aggregation, 802.1AX, 1:1 LACP


redundancy

SyncE:

Supported

TDM PWE:

RFC4553 SAToP (MEF8)

Other:

Link Loss Forwarding


Mirroring
Broadcast Storm Control
L2 Filter
Port Isolation

3.5.3.6 XPIC (CCDP) Function


QPSK to 256QAM modulation at 14/28/56 MHz channel spacing.

3.5.3.7 AMR, 1+1 and XPIC Combination


AMR and 1+1, AMR and XPIC combinations are available.

3.5.3.8 DXC (E1 Crossconnect) Capacity


Up to 168 168 E1 non-blocking.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-14

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3.5.3.9 Card Redundancy


Power Supply [PS-M]:

1+1

Main Card [MC-M]:

1+1

3.5.3.10 User Authentication


RADIUS, local

3.5.3.11 Loopback
Far-end Baseband Loopback
Near-end Baseband Loopback
IF Loopback

3.5.3.12 Modern TX Output Control


Manual Control
Automatic Control (ATPC)
Mute Control

3.5.3.13 Performance Monitoring (PMON) / Metering


PMON Items:

OFS, BBE, ES, SES, SEP and UAS

Metering Items:

Output power level (TX Power)


Received signal level (AGC V)
Bit Error Rate (BER MON)

LAN Monitoring Items:

RX Unicast
RX Broadcast
RX Multicast
RX Pause
RX CRC Error

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

3-15

3.5.3.14 Multi Service Engine [MSE-A Card]


This Interface Card supports TDM PWE3 (Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge).
Protocols:

SAToP (RFC4553, MEF8)

Number of MSE-A to Mount: 1 at maximum


Number of E1 Paths:

Up to 64

Supported Payload Size:

32 (+ Padding), 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256 bytes

Jitter Buffer Size:

2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 ms

Number of ACR (Adaptive Clock Recovery):


16

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
3-16/END

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

This page is intentionally left blank.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-1

4. NE SETUP
NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft Internet Explorer for the browsing
software as an example.

4.1 Login, Logout and Exit


4.1.1 Log In to NE
Users are registered by means of login names and their passwords. To protect the
network and network management system from unauthorized access or unauthorized
modifications, three levels with different privileges (refer to the table shown in
Section 4.4.2 User Access Levels) define users. The available functions to operate
depend on the users privilege level. Therefore, some of the functions may or may not
be carried out.
The highest or administrator level (Admin) has the full access to the network and
network management system.
Procedure 4-1
1. Power on the computer.
2. Log in to the Windows as the Administrator.
3. Click start, and select Programs Internet Explore. The Internet Explorer

window appears.
4. In Address field, enter an IP address of the NE with /weblct/ added as shown

below:
Example:

http://172.17.254.253/weblct/

Figure 4-1 Launching Internet Explore

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-2

NE SETUP

5. Enter a user name and his/her password into User Name and Password fields:

Figure 4-2 WebLCT Login Window

Following are the default user name and its password for iPASOLINK 1000:
User Name:
Password:

Admin
12345678

6. Click the OK button blow the Login fields. System Status information box

appears.
7. Click the OK button, or wait till the box automatically disappears. (The System
Status information box disappears in a while without clicking the OK button if

you wait.)

Figure 4-3 System Status Information Box

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-3

The main window for WebLCT appears:

Figure 4-4 WebLCT Main Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-4

NE SETUP

4.1.2 Log Out from NE


Procedure 4-2
1. Click Logout button in the upper right of WebLCT main window.
Logout button

Figure 4-5 Logout Button on WebLCT Main Window

The Confirmation dialog box appears.


2. Click the OK button to log out.

Figure 4-6 Confirmation Dialog Box

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-5

3. The browser returns to WebLCT Login window.

Figure 4-7 WebLCT Login Window

This step ends the procedure.

4.1.3 Exit WebLCT


Following are the methods to exit WebLCT:

Select File (F) Close (X) from Internet Explorer menu bar.
Click

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

button in the upper right of Internet Explorer.

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-6

NE SETUP

4.2 WebLCT Main Window


Following describes the contents and structure of WebLCT main window:
(1) Logged-In User Name
(2) Refresh button
(3) Auto Mode check box
(4) Hide Equipment View check box

(7) Opposite Site Links


(8) Maintenance button

(5) Equipment Status View


(6) ACT Operating
State

(10) Menu Tree

(9) Logout button

(11) Status List

Figure 4-8 WebLCT Main Window Contents

(1) Logged-In User Name [Login User]


This field indicates a user name that is currently logged in.
(2) Refresh button
Click Refresh button to manually update the current status displayed in the WebLCT
main window.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-7

(3) Auto Mode check box


Check (click to leave a tick in) Auto Mode check box to enable refreshing the
window automatically.
(4) Hide Equipment View check box
Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide Equipment View check box to hide the
illustrated equipment status view.
(5) Equipment Status View
This field shows the current equipment status.
(6) ACT Operating State
This field indicates the operating side of Main Card(s). MAIN 1 indicates that the
unprotected Main Card is in operation, or that the protected Main Card in Slot 1 is in
operation (active). MAIN 2 indicates that the protected Main Card in Slot 2 is in
operation (active).
(7) Opposite Site Links
This drop-down list shows a list of NEs on the opposite sites. A user can select an NE
from the list to log in to.
(8) Maintenance button
Click Maintenance tool button before starting any maintenance operations.
(9) Logout button
Click Logout button to log out from NE.
(10) Menu Tree
This part shows the menus for the equipment configuration and provisioning by a tree
view. Available operations via WebLCT are:
(a) Current Status
Current Status lists current status and event histories of the equipment by each
part of an NE (Active Alarm, Event Log, ODU, IDU, AUX).

(b) Easy Setup Wizard


Easy Setup Wizard navigates a user to set up the basic equipment configuration

including registering/removing the ODU/IDU Cards. This wizard also provides


easier steps to set up the cross-connections, VLAN service and other necessary
configurations for the new equipment.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-8

NE SETUP

(c) Equipment Setup


Select this menu to register or remove ODU and IDU Cards and other relevant
configurations.
(d) Provisioning
Select this menu to configure the detailed settings of IDU and ODU.
(e) Maintenance Control
Maintenance Control executes a protection switch, Loopback, Hardware Reset,

Firmware Reset, etc.


(f) Maintenance Test
Maintenance Test measures the link quality of Ethernet traffic.

(g) Current/History PMON/RMON Report


Select this menu to retrieve the Current reports or history of Performance
Monitor (PMON) and Remote Network Monitor (RMON). A user can also
exports the data to external storage (local PC, USB Memory, etc.) For more
details, refer to the Maintenance manual.
(h) Metering
Metering measures the real time TX power, RX level, ODU power supply and

BER.
(i) Equipment Utility
Select this menu to upload and download the equipment configuration data,
software, firmware and FPGA data.
(j) User Account/Security Setting
Select this menu to add, remove and modify user accounts for the equipment, and
set up the security levels for the user accounts.
(k) Inventory
Inventory retrieves the information regarding the equipment and software

license.
(11) Status List
Click a tab to select a type of status to show its logs.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-9

4.3 Setup Software License


Software License Key must be installed to operate iPASOLINK equipment via
WebLCT. Some operations, such as registering user accounts, do not require the
license. Thus, the Software License Key should be installed sometime between
logging in to WebLCT and registering/setting the equipment attributes.

4.3.1 Import Software License Key


Procedure 4-3
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select Import
License key. The Import License key window appears.
3. Click the Setup tool button.
Setup button

Figure 4-9 S/W License Setup Import License key Window

File selection window for Import License key appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-10

NE SETUP

4. Click the

button, and select a target file:

Figure 4-10 Import License key Option Window

Figure 4-11 Choose File to Upload Option Window


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-12 Import License key Option Window (selected)


6. When the importing process ends, the following dialog box appears. Click the OK

button to proceed:

Figure 4-13 Import License key Dialog Box

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-11

4.3.2 Radio Capacity Setting


Procedure 4-4
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select Radio
Capacity Setting. The Radio Capacity Setting window appears.
3. Click the Setup tool button.

Setup button

Figure 4-14 Radio Capacity Setting Window


Radio Capacity Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-12

NE SETUP

4. Select the MODEM Position from the New State drop-down list to specify the
state, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-15 Radio Capacity Setting Box

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-16 Information Box

The Radio Capacity Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-13

6. Confirm the parameters displayed.

Figure 4-17 Radio Capacity Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-14

NE SETUP

4.3.3 SFP Port License Setting


Procedure 4-5
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select SFP
Port License Setting. The SFP Port License Setting window appears.
2. Click the Setup tool button.
Setup button

Figure 4-18 SFP Port License Setting Window

SFP Port License Setting option window appears.

3. Select the desired Slot # from the New State drop-down list, then click the OK

button.

OK button

Figure 4-19 SFP Port License Setting Box

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-15

4. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-20 Information Box


5. The SFP Port License Setting window updates the information. Confirm the

parameters displayed.

Figure 4-21 SFP Port License Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-16

NE SETUP

4.4 User Management


The user management is a function to manage an authorized user to access to a
network system, and to prevent an unauthorized user from accessing to the network
system.

4.4.1 Overview
4.4.1.1 Access Level
iPASOLINK provides three user access levels with different privilege as shown in the
table below. For details of each access level and its available operations, refer to
Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels.
Table 4-1 Access Levels
Component

Available Task

File Operation

SNMP Operation

Operator

View the equipment configuration and


status.

Upload only

Obtain

Config

In addition to tasks available by


Operator level, manage radio base
band and switching function.

Upload

Obtain

Download

Set

In addition to tasks available by Config


level, manage user accounts and time
adjustments.

Upload

Obtain

Download

Set

Admin

NOTES:Following describes the terms, such as upload and download mentioned in


the table above:
1. Upload is to copy a file from NE to an external storage, such as WebLCT PC.
2. Download is to copy a file from an external storage to the internal storage of
equipment.

4.4.1.2 User Group


User Group configuration allows a user to manage the protocol type and access level
for each group.
A user of the specified User Group in iPASOLINK will be assigned with the predefined protocol and access level of the group. In addition to the three default user
groups, up to six user groups can be added. The default user groups are shown below:
NOTE: Options specified to the default User Groups cannot be modified.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-17

Table 4-2 User Group Profile


Group Name

Classification

TELNET

SSH

FTP

HTTP

SNMP

Access Level

OPERATOR

Unchangeable

Operator

CONFIG

Unchangeable

Config

ADMIN

Unchangeable

Admin

4.4.2 User Access Levels


Following shows the access level for each task. Remote means that a user makes an
access to the equipment remotely.
Meanings:
R/W: A user can both browse and modify settings.
R: A user can browse the settings.
O: The task is operational by a remote access but is restricted according to the access

level assigned to the user.


Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (1 of 4)
WebLCT Menu

Admin

Config

Operator

Remote

Easy Setup Wizard


Easy Setup

R/W

MODEM Setup

R/W

AMR Setup

R/W

Management Setup

R/W

TDM Setup

R/W

ETH Setup

R/W

PWE Setup

R/W

Equipment Configuration

R/W

Radio Configuration

R/W

AMR Configuration

R/W

General Setting

R/W

General Setting (Detail)

R/W

Routing Setting

R/W

IP Access Control Setting

R/W

Equipment Setup

Network Management
Configuration

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-18

NE SETUP

Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (2 of 4)


WebLCT Menu

Admin

Config

Operator

Remote

Provisioning
MODEM Function Setting

ETH Function Setting

E1/STM-1/Cross-Connect
Setting

MODEM Port Setting

R/W

R/W

Radio Switch Setting

R/W

R/W

TX Power Setting

R/W

R/W

ALM Mode Setting

R/W

R/W

XPIC Setting

R/W

R/W

AMR Setting

R/W

R/W

Bridge Setting

R/W

R/W

ETH Port Setting

R/W

R/W

VLAN Setting

R/W

R/W

FDB Setting

R/W

R/W

ETH OAM Setting

R/W

R/W

RSTP Setting

R/W

R/W

ERP Setting

R/W

R/W

Link Aggregation Setting

R/W

R/W

QoS/Classification Setting

R/W

R/W

Filter Setting

R/W

R/W

Port Isolate

R/W

R/W

LLF Setting

R/W

R/W

Broadcast Storm Control


Setting

R/W

R/W

Cross Connect Setting

R/W

R/W

E1 Port Setting

R/W

R/W

STM-1 Port Setting

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

PWE Setting
Equipment Clock/
Synchronization Setting

Equipment Clock Setting

R/W

R/W

EXT Clock Setting

R/W

R/W

Relay-Alarm Mapping
Setting

Relay Control Setting

R/W

R/W

Cluster Alarm Setting

R/W

R/W

V.11/OW Setting

V.11/SC Setting

R/W

R/W

V.11 Directional Setting

R/W

R/W

OW Setting

R/W

R/W

Correlation Setting

R/W

R/W

Alarm Severity Setting

R/W

R/W

AIS Setting

R/W

R/W

BER Threshold Setting

R/W

Alarm/AIS Setting

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-19

Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (3 of 4)


WebLCT Menu
PMON/RMON Threshold
Setting

Admin

Config

Operator

Remote

PMON Threshold

R/W

R/W

PMON Other

R/W

R/W

RMON Threshold

R/W

R/W

RMON Other

R/W

R/W

AUX Input Setting

R/W

R/W

AUX Output Setting

R/W

R/W

MODEM Loopback Control

R/W

R/W

TDM Loopback Control


(E1 Loopback 1)

R/W

R/W

TDM Loopback Control


(E1 Loopback 2)

R/W

R/W

TDM Loopback Control


(STM-1 Loopback 1)

R/W

R/W

TDM Loopback Control


(STM-1 Loopback 2)

R/W

R/W

MODEM TX/RX Switch


Control

R/W

R/W

RSTP Control

R/W

ERP Control

R/W

R/W

LAG Revert Control

R/W

R/W

SNCP Switch Control

R/W

R/W

APS Switch Group Control

R/W

R/W

Timing Source Switch


Control

R/W

R/W

MODEM Maintenance Control

R/W

R/W

O*1

Laser Shutdown Control

R/W

R/W

OW Buzzer Control

R/W

R/W

H/W Reset Control

R/W

F/W Reset Control

R/W

Switch Over / Status


Control

R/W

R/W

PMON/RMON/FDB Clear

R/W

Offline Maintenance

R/W

R/W

AUX Setting

Maintenance Control
Loopback Control

Protection Control

H/W_F/W Reset Control

Main Card Control

Maintenance Test
ETH OAM LB/LT/LM/DM

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-20

NE SETUP

Table 4-3 User Access Privilege Levels (4 of 4)


WebLCT Menu

Admin

Config

Operator

Remote

Current/History PMON/RMON Report


MODEM PMON Report

E1 PMON Report

STM-1 PMON Report

ETH RMON Report

VLAN Counter Report

R/W

R/W

Export (NE -> Storage) Utility

R/W

R/W

Update (Storage -> NE) Utility

R/W

R/W

Program ROM Switching

R/W

USB Memory Utility

R/W

Log Clear Function

Shipment

R/W

Date/Time Setting

R/W

User Authentication Management

R/W

User Account Management

R/W

User Group Profile Configuration

R/W

Security Management

Service Status Setting

R/W

RADIUS Setting

R/W

Equipment Inventory Information

S/W License Information

Import License Key

R/W

Radio Capacity Setting

R/W

SFP Port License Setting

R/W

Metering
Current Metering
Equipment Utility

User Account/Security Setting


Login User

Inventory

S/W License Setup

*1: CW Control is not editable.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-21

4.4.3 Default User Account


iPASOLINK provides three default user accounts with pre-defined access levels and
privileges. In addition to these default user accounts, up to nine user accounts can be
added.
Following describes the pre-defined default user accounts:
Table 4-4 Default User Accounts
User Name

Default Password

Description

User Group

User

87654321

User is able to confirm the system configuration


and equipment status, but is not able to make
any changes to the configuration.

OPERATOR

Config

87654321

In addition to the tasks available for User, Config


user is able to operate the radio management,
base band management, switching management
for C-Plane control

CONFIG

Admin

12345678

In addition to the tasks available for Config,


Admin user is able to operate database
management, file management, user
management and time adjustment for M-Plane
control.

ADMIN

4.4.4 User Account


Following are the functions to manage user accounts supported by iPASOLINK:
Login User List
Login User List displays the information of registered user accounts. From this list,

user profiles, such as passwords and User Group Profiles can be modified.
User Authentication Configuration
User Authentication Configuration provides the authentication methods to select.

User Account Management


User Account Management is used to register new user accounts, and to modify/

delete the registered user accounts.


User Group Profile Configuration
USer Group Profile Configuration is used to register new User Groups, and to
modify/delete the registered User Groups.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-22

NE SETUP

4.4.4.1 Login User List


This function allows users to view and confirm the registered user accounts.
Procedure 4-6
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select Login User List. The Login User List appears.

Figure 4-22 Login User List

This step ends the procedure.

4.4.4.2 User Authentication Configuration


An authentication method for iPASOLINK can be specified using the User
Authentication Configuration.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
Authentication Setting
Determines and sets the authentication method to log in to iPASOLINK.
Privilege ID / Group Name
Assigns authority levels to the registered Group Names.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-23

(1) Authentication Setting


Procedure 4-7
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Authentication Configuration. The User Authentication
Configuration window appears.
3. Click the Authentication Setting link.
click the link

Figure 4-23 User Authentication Configuration Window


Authentication Setting option window appears.
4. Select values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-24 Authentication Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-24

NE SETUP

Table 4-5 Authentication Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Authentication
Method

IDU Only

Login authentications are proceeded only by the internal


authentication function, using the accounts and their passwords
registered to the equipment.

IDU + RADIUS

If it fails at the internal authentication function, the external


authentication by RADIUS Server is proceeded. To use this
function, settings for RADIUS are required.

IDU -> RADIUS Server

Login authentications are proceeded by the order from IDU to


RADIUS Server. This option is available when the
Authentication Method is set to IDU + RADIUS.

RADIUS Server -> IDU

Login authentications are proceeded by the order from RADIUS


Server to IDU. This option is available when the Authentication
Method is set to IDU + RADIUS.

Authentication
Sequence

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-25 Information Dialog Box

The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 4-26 User Authentication Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-25

(2) Privilege ID / Group Name


Procedure 4-8
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Authentication Configuration. The User Authentication
Configuration window appears.
3. Click a Privilege ID No. link of the target group.
Privilege ID numbers

Figure 4-27 User Authentication Configuration Window


Privilege ID option window for the selected ID number appears.
4. Select the method to assign, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-28 Privilege ID Option Window


Table 4-6 Setting for Privilege ID
Parameter

Value

Description

Group Name

Operator

Each group is mapped to a privilege level defined by the vendor


specific message.

Config
ADMIN
Default Permission

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-26

NE SETUP

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-29 Information Dialog Box

The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 4-30 User Authentication Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

4.4.4.3 User Account Management


This function allows users to add registrations of new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
NOTE: The operations regarding this function are available by the Admin-level
user(s) only.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-27

Add User Account


This function is used to register a new user account.
NOTE: In addition to the three default accounts, up to nine user accounts can be
added.
Modify User Account
This function is used to modify the information of registered user accounts including
their password and User Group.
Delete User Account
This function is used to remove registered user accounts.

(1) Add User Accounts


NOTE: Security Level (Hash Algorithm / Priv (Privacy) Algorithm) is required to be
set to add new user accounts. Once a registration of a user is completed,
the security level of this user cannot be modified.
Procedure 4-9
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Account Management. The User Account Management window

appears.
3. Click Add User tool button.
Add User button

Figure 4-31 User Account Management Window

The User Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-28

NE SETUP

4. Enter the appropriate value to each parameter for the user to be added.

Figure 4-32 User Setting Option Window

i) Enter a User Name within one to 31 characters long.


ii) Click Set Password tool button on the tool bar to open the Set Password option
window, enter the password within eight to 31 characters long, then click the
OK button.

Figure 4-33 Set Password Option Window

iii) Select Group Name. See Table 4-2 User Group Profile for User Groups.
iv) Select Security Level:
Selecting NoAuthNoPriv has no additional settings. Go to Step 5.
Selecting AuthNoPriv enables Auth Algorithm option. Click a radio button to
select the algorithm type, and enter Auth Key. See (a) Setting Authentication
Algorithm below.
Selecting AuthPriv enables both Auth Algorithm and Priv Algorithm options.
Click radio buttons to select algorithm types, and enter Auth Key and Priv Key.
See (a) Setting Authentication Algorithm and (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-29

(a) Setting Authentication Algorithm


Select AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv to enable the Auth Algorithm option.
Select MD5 or SHA by clicking its radio button.
Click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
Enter the Auth Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.

Figure 4-34 Select AuthNoPriv

Verify the selection and entry.


To set Priv Algorithm, go to (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.
To complete the procedure, go to Step 5.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-30

NE SETUP

(b) Setting Privacy Algorithm


Select AuthPriv to enable the Priv Algorithm option.
Select DES or AES by clicking its radio button.
Click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
Enter the Priv Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.

Figure 4-35 Set Privacy Algorithm

Verify the selection and entry, then go to Step 5.


5. Click the OK button of the User Setting option window. The Information dialog

box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-36 Information Dialog Box

The User Account Management window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-31

7. Confirm the registered user account information.

Figure 4-37 User Account Management Window

This step ends the procedure.


Table 4-7 User Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

User Name

(text field)

Valid value: One to 31 characters long.

Password

(read only)

Valid value: Eight to 31 characters long. To enter the password, click Set
Password button on the tool bar.

Group Name

ADMIN

Assign a Group Name for the user to be added. Refer to Table 4-2 User
Group Profile for User Group.

CONFIG
OPERATOR
GROUP
Security Level

NoAuthNoPriv

Allows a user to log in without authentication and encryption.

AuthNoPriv

A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting this


option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.

AuthPriv

A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or AES.


Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button below.

MD5

MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm for


authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of
original data while transmitting, the original data will be converting the
Hash by comparing them at both ends.

SHA

SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of original data
while transmitting, less than 2 64 bits of the original data will be converting
the Hash of 160 bits by comparing it at both ends.

Auth Key

(read only)

Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter the
Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.

Priv Algorithm

DES

DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key. The block
size is 64 bits.

AES

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block encryption.


The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is 128/192/256 bits.

(read only)

Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set Priv Key
button on the tool bar.

Auth Algorithm

Priv Key

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-32

NE SETUP

(2) Modify User Account


Procedure 4-10
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Account Management. The User Account Management window

appears.
3. Click on a User Name of the target user account.

Figure 4-38 User Account Management Window

The User Setting option window appears.


4. Modify the registered value(s):

To modify the password, click Set


Password button on the tool bar to
open the Set Password option
window, enter the password
within eight to 31 characters long,
and click the OK button of the Set
Password option window.
To modify the Group Name, select
an appropriate Group Name from
Figure 4-39 User Setting Option Window
the Group Name drop-down list.
See Table 4-2 User Group Profile
for User Groups.

Figure 4-40 Set Password Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-33

5. When completed, click OK button of the User Setting option window.

Figure 4-41 User Setting Option Window

The Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-42 Information Dialog Box


User Account Management window updates the information.
7. Confirm the modified user account information.

Figure 4-43 User Account Management Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-34

NE SETUP

(3) Delete User Account


Procedure 4-11
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Account Management. The User Account Management window

appears.
3. Click Delete User tool button on the tool bar

Delete User button

Figure 4-44 User Account Management Window

The User Setting option window appears.


4. From User Name drop-down list, select a user account to be removed, and click
the OK button.

Figure 4-45 User Setting (Delete) Option Window

The Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-35

5. Confirm the user name to be removed, and click the OK button.

Figure 4-46 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-47 Information Dialog Box

The User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected user account has been removed.

Figure 4-48 User Account Management Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-36

NE SETUP

4.4.4.4 User Group Profile Configuration


This operation registers/modifies User Group Profiles. The privilege of iPASOLINK
user is the subject to change according to the user access level and protocols that are
assigned by the User Group Profile. Only the Admin level user(s) is/are available to
configure the settings.
Add User Group Profile
This operation registers a new User Group Profile adding to the default User Group
Profiles.
NOTE: In addition to the three default User Group Profiles, up to six User Group
Profiles can be registered.
Modify User Group Profile
This operation modifies the Access Level and Protocol of the registered User Group
Profile.
Delete User Group Profile
This operation deletes a registered User Group Profile.
(1) Add User Group
Procedure 4-12
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile
Configuration window appears.
3. Click Add Group tool button on the tool bar.
Add Group button

Figure 4-49 User Group Profile Configuration Window

The Group Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-37

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

OK button

Figure 4-50 Group Setting Option Window


Table 4-8 User Group Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Group Name

(text field)

Valid value: one to 32 characters long.

FTP

Allow

Select to use FTP protocol for file transfer.

Deny

Not to use FTP for file transfer.

Allow

Select to use SFTP protocol for file transfer.

Deny

Not to use SFTP for file transfer.

Allow

Select to use HTTP protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.

Deny

Not to use HTTP for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.

Allow

Select to use HTTPS protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.

Deny

Not to use HTTPS for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.

Allow

Select to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.

Deny

Not to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.

Admin

Specifies the user access level. See Table 4-3 User Access Privilege
Levels for each levels description.

SFTP

HTTP

HTTPS

SNMP

Access Level

Config
Operator

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-38

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-51 Information Dialog Box

The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the information of newly added User Group Profile is displayed.

Figure 4-52 User Group Profile Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-39

(2) Modify User Group


Procedure 4-13
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile
Configuration window appears.
3. Click on a target Group Name.

Figure 4-53 User Group Profile Configuration Window

The Group Setting option window appears.


4. Modify parameters:

OK button

Figure 4-54 Group Setting Option Window

Click either Allow or Deny radio button to select a protocol.


Select the appropriate Access Level from its drop-down list.
5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-40

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-55 Information Dialog Box

The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.


7. Confirm the displayed Group Profile information.

Figure 4-56 User Group Profile Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-41

(3) Delete User Group


NOTE: A User Group can be removed only when it has no assigned user account.
Procedure 4-14
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to
select User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile
Configuration window appears.
3. Click Delete Group tool button on the tool bar.
Delete Group button

Figure 4-57 User Group Profile Configuration Window

The Group Setting option window appears.


4. Select a target Group Name to be removed from the drop-down list, and click the
OK button.

Figure 4-58 Group Setting (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-42

NE SETUP

5. Confirm the selected Group Name, and click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-59 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-60 Information Dialog Box

The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the target group name has been removed.

Figure 4-61 User Group Profile Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-43

4.5 Security Management


4.5.1 Overview
iPASOLINK supports the following protocols and security management functions:
(1) SNMPv1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1)
SNMPv1 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,
which is specified by the following RFCs:

Table 4-9 RFC Standards


RFC No.

Title

RFC 1155

Structure and Identification of Management Information on TCP/IPbased Internets (SMIv1)

RFC 1157

A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 1213

Management Information Base on Network Management of TCP/IPbased internets: MIB-II

iPASOLINK enables SNMPv1 to support the following functions:


GET/SET of MIB
Following are response to the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) supported by
SNMPv1.
Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,
security settings, etc., can be registered via the WebLCT.
By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use
the other than the default port, change the settings via the WebLCT.
Table 4-10 PDU Supported by SNMPv1
Item

Description

GetRequest

Requests the specified instance value.

GetNextRequest

Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value


in the list.

GetResponse

Responds to the corresponding GetRequest and Set Request.

SetRequest

Sets the specified instance value.

Trap

Informs the change of state and troubles (SNMPv1-Trap).

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-44

NE SETUP

Send Trap
iPASOLINK can send SNMPv1 trap initiatively to UDP Port 162. Except for sending
the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one additional
destination. A user can also specify the community name and UDP Port.
User Application (Log)
iPASOLINK records the names of logged-in users in the log file.

(2) SNMPv2c (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c)


SNMPv2c is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network,
and is a revised version of SNMPv1. The differences between v1 and v2c are that the
GetBulk, the inform request, unified packet format of each PDU are added,
conforming to SMIv2 and following RFCs:
Table 4-11 RFC Standards
RFC No.

Title

SNMPv2c
RFC 1901

Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2

RFC 3416

Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management


Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3417

Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3428

Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management


Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3584

Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internetstandard Network Management Framework

SMIv2

NWD-118790-04E

RFC 2578

Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)

RFC 2579

Textual Conventions for SMIv2

RFC 2580

Conformance Statements for SMIv2

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-45

iPASOLINK enables SNMPv2c to support the following functions:


GET/SET of MIB
iPASOLINK responds to the request of the network management system.
Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,
security settings, etc., can be registered via WebLCT.
By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use
other than the default port, change the settings via WebLCT.
Table 4-12 PDU Supported by SNMPv2c
Item

Description

GetRequest

Requests the specified instance value.

GetNextRequest

Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the


list.

Response

Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.

SetRequest

Sets the specified instance value.

SNMPv2-Trap

Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.

GetBulkRequest

Requests a number of instance value.

InformRequest

Informs an event.

Send Trap
iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2 trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP port
162. Except for sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP
address of one additional destination. User can also specify the community name and
UDP Port.
User Application (Log)
iPASOLINK records the logged-in user name in the log file.

(3) SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3)


SNMPv3 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and
is the newest version of SNMP. The differences between SNMPv1/v2c and v3 are
that the user authentication, ciphered communication, and the change-packet format
are enhanced, conforming to the following RFCs for SMIv2 that define SNMPv3,
SNMPv2c:

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-46

NE SETUP

Table 4-13 RFC Standards


RFC No.

Title

SNMPv3
RFC 3411

An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol


(SNMP) Management Frameworks

RFC 3412

Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management


Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3413

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications

RFC 3414

User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network


Management Protocol (SNMPv3)

RFC 3415

View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network


Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3416

Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management


Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3417

Trans port Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3418

Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management


Protocol (SNMP)

RFC 3584

Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internetstandard Network Management Framework

SMIv2

NWD-118790-04E

RFC 2578

Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)

RFC 2579

Textual Conventions for SMIv2

RFC 2580

Conformance Statements for SMIv2

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-47

iPASOLINK provides SNMPv3 to support the following function:


GET/SET of MIB.
Response the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) corresponding to SNMPv3.
Table 4-14 PDU Supported by SNMPv3
Item

Description

GetRequest

Requests the specified instance value.

GetNextRequest

Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the


list.

Response

Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.

SetRequest

Sets the specified instance value.

SNMPv2-Trap

Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.

GetBulkRequest

Requests a number of instance value.

InformRequest

Informs an event.

Report

Returns a packet if the reportableFlag is set to on.

Send Trap
iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2-Trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP Port
162.
IP address of SNMP entity, security level, and user name are required to set the Trap.
Authentic method and authentic password are required when the security level is
authNoPriv or authPriv.
Encryption algorithm and encrypted password are required when the security level is
authPriv.
Security (user authentication, session management and encryption)
SNMPv3 PDU is not authenticated by the community name as v1, v2c., but by the
user name, which requires the user registrations beforehand.
User authentication is carried out when the security level of the sent SNMP request is
authNoPriv or authPriv. The cryptographic hash function of the password is
selectable between MD5 and SHA.
Ciphered communication is enabled by the user authentication when the security
level of the sent SNMP request is authPriv. The cipher algorithm is selectable
between DES and AES. For the ciphered communication, a password must be set

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-48

NE SETUP

when registering users.


User can also specify an SNMP Engine ID for each NE, which should be 16-byte
long and unique within the network.

(4) NTP (Network Time Protocol)


This protocol synchronizes the clocks of the server and associated clients in a
network, which is specified by the following RFCs:
Table 4-15 RFC Standards
RFC No.

Title

RFC 1305

Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and


Analysis

RFC 2030

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OS

iPASOLINK can be set either as NTP Client or Server. Following shows the
available functions of NTP Client and Server:
As NTP Client
When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client sends a request to
obtain the current time to the pre-configured server, and then adjusts the clock
according to the replied information. Up to four NTP Severs can be registered via
WebLCT.
When the multicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client will listen to the
broadcast of the time server and then adjusts the clock according to the first received
valid broadcast and ignores the broadcasts from remaining servers if exist.
If the NTP Client receives neither a response nor broadcasts, the synchronization
among the Server and Clients cannot be accomplished, which allows to use the
current time of the equipment.
As NTP Server
When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Server, Server will respond the
current time information to the Client.
When the multicast mode is selected, the Server will broadcast the current time
information of its own periodically.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-49

(5) FTP (File Transfer Protocol)


This protocol transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the following RFCs.
Table 4-16 RFC Standards
RFC No.

Title

RFC 959

Original FTP spec.

RFC 1123

The small FTP related section extends / clarifies RFC-959

RFC 2228

FTP security extensions (vsftpd implements the small subset needed to


support TLS / SSL connections)

RFC 2389

Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands

RFC 2428

Essentially IPv6 support

Using iPASOLINK as FTP Server provides the following functions:


Data Upload and Download Service
Data upload and download service are available; however the data download is
restricted, which can be operated only by a user with the appropriate privilege (refer
to 4.4.2 User Access Levels).
Files and the directories accessed via FTP protocol are predetermined as well as the
file names and types, which will be downloaded.
Session Management
Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
The default setting of TCP Port 21 to listen and transfer a file on TCP port 20 can be
changed using WebLCT. When Passive Mode is selected, the port number is selected
by the equipment automatically.
If no command is issued by the Client for ninety seconds, the current TCP session
will be disconnected automatically.
User Authentication Function
iPASOLINK supports two types of the authentications:
External RADIUS Server with internal authentication
Internal authentication only

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-50

NE SETUP

(6) SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol)


This protocol securely transfers a file among NEs, using the mechanism of SSH.
iPASOLINK uses the SFTP Server to enable the following functions:
Providing Function of Secure File Transfer
In order to establish a secure network for uploading/downloading files, SFTP
function is provided.
Data Upload/Download Service
Data upload and download service are available; however, downloading to
iPASOLINK is available only by the user(s) who is/are authorized to write data into
iPASOLINK. Only the designated directories can be accessed by SFTP. For files
such as F/W, FPGA, Configuration Data, etc., their storage path and file names are
designated as well, depending on their types.
If 90 seconds passe without any progress in the file transfer, the file transfer is
canceled.
Session Management
Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
If 90 seconds pass without any FTP commands issued from the client, the session is
terminated by the FTP Command Time Out.
SFTP uses the TCP Port #22 by default.
Changing the SSH Connection Port # requires special attention since the Port # of
SSH Connection and that of SFTP connection are the same (cannot change either one
alone).
User Authentication Function
For login requests from the external clients, either of the following authentication
process is carried out: internal + external authentication, or internal authentication
only by RADIUS Server. The external authentication will be referred to the external
authentication server. The maximum number of accesses are specified, which
includes SSH connections as well, where an access after reaching the limited number
of accesses will be denied. PAM is used for the management.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-51

(7) HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)


HTTP is the protocol for transferring data between Web server and client (WebLCT).
The HTTP is based on the following RFC standards:
Table 4-17 RFC Standards
RFC No.

Title

RFC 1945

Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0

RFC 2616

Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1

Using iPASOLINK as HTTP server enables the following functions:


WebLCT
WebLCT operation via HTTP protocol is available.
Session Management
Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the
login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted.
The default port number of HTTP Service is 80, which can be changed using
WebLCT.
User Authentication Function
iPASOLINK supports the internal authentication only.

(8) HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL/TLS)


HTTPS is the protocol that the encryption function by SSL is added to HTTP used by
Web Servers and Clients (Web Browser, etc.) for receiving/transmitting data.
The HTTPS is specified by the following standard:
Table 4-18 RFC Standards
RFC No.

Title

RFC 2818

HTTP over TLS

Providing Web Contents


Web contents via HTTPS is provided, where the multiple languages are supported.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-52

NE SETUP

Session Management among External Terminals


HTTPS accepts an access from the external terminal, submits the server certification
to the external terminal, carries out the process of the server authentication based on
the public-key cryptosystem, before the login authentication process. The Port # is
443 by default, which can be changed by WebLCT/CLI/SNMP. Installing Apache
1.3.x or later enables to support HTTP/1.0 and HTTP/1.1.
User Authentication Function
For login requests from the external clients, only the internal authentication is carried
out. Accesses are restricted using the user authentication (the Basic Authentication).
The external authentications are referred to the external authentication server.

4.5.2 Service Status Setting


Service Status Setting displays the status of service and protocol:
Procedure 4-15
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand Security Management under the User Account / Security Setting.
3. From the Security Management options, select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-53

4. Confirm the status of each Server:

Figure 4-62 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-54

NE SETUP

Figure 4-63 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

Figure 4-64 Service Status Indication


Table 4-19 Service Status Indication
Status

Description

Running

Protocol/Service is enabled.

Stopped

Protocol/Service is disabled.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-55

4.5.2.1 SNMP
Procedure 4-16
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand Security Management under the User Account / Security Setting.
3. From the Security Management options, select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.
4. Click the SNMP link:

SNMP

Figure 4-65 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP)

The SNMP Setting option window appears.


5. Specify an appropriate value to each parameter.

Figure 4-66 SNMP Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-56

NE SETUP

Table 4-20 SNMP Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

SNMPv1/v2c

Enable

Enables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Running)

Disable

Disables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Stopped)

Enable

Enables SNMPv3 (Running)

Disable

Disables SNMPv3 (Stopped)

1 to 65535

From 1 to 65535 are available for UDP Port No.

161

161 is the default UDP Port No.

SNMPv3
UDP Port

CAUTION: In order to apply the values properly, CPU must be


rebooted when UDP Port Number(s) is/are changed.
6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-67 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm the displayed SNMP information.

Figure 4-68 Service Status Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-57

4.5.2.2 SNMP Community


This operation registers, modifies, or deletes the SNMP Manager information. Only
the registered SNMP managers have the right to access the equipment. Up to ten
servers can be registered.
(1) Registration of SNMP Community
Procedure 4-17
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click a Community No. to add.
SNMP Community numbers

Figure 4-69 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

The SNMP Community option window appears.


4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-70 SNMP Community Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-58

NE SETUP

Table 4-21 SNMP Community Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Community Name

(text field)

Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value: One


to 31 characters long. A request with a different
Community Name will be rejected.

Access Level

Admin

Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 4-3


User Access Privilege Levels for details.

Config
Operator
Access Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Specifies the valid IP address or network address of


the SNMP Manager(s).

Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).

5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-71 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the newly added SNMP Community information is displayed.

Figure 4-72 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-59

(2) Modify SNMP Community


Procedure 4-18
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Community No. of the SNMP Community field.
SNMP Community numbers

Figure 4-73 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

The SNMP Community option window appears.


4. Modify parameters:

Figure 4-74 SNMP Community Option Window (Modify)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-60

NE SETUP

Table 4-22 SNMP Community Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Community Name

(text field)

Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value:


One to 31 characters long. A request with a different
Community Name will be rejected.

Access Level

Admin

Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 4-3


User Access Privilege Levels for details.

Config
Operator
Access Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Specifies the valid IP address or network address of


the SNMP Manager(s).

Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-75 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the modified SNMP Community information is displayed.

Figure 4-76 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-61

(3) Delete SNMP Community


Procedure 4-19
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Delete SNMP Community tool button on the tool bar.
Delete SNMP Community button

Figure 4-77 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

The Delete SNMP Community option window appears.


4. Select an SNMP Community No. from the drop-down list, and click the OK

button.

Figure 4-78 Delete SNMP Communication Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-62

NE SETUP

5. Click the OK button when confirmed.

Figure 4-79 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-80 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the selected SNMP Community information has been removed.

Figure 4-81 Service Status Setting Window (SNCP Community)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-63

4.5.2.3 SNMP Trap Entry


This option configures the SNMP Trap:
(1) SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 4-20
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.

SNMP Trap Entry No.

Figure 4-82 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-64

NE SETUP

4. Specify the appropriate value for each parameter:

(a) SNMPv1

Figure 4-83 SNMPv1 Trap Entry Option Window

(b) SNMPv2c

Figure 4-84 SNMPv2c Trap Entry Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-65

(c) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Trap)

Figure 4-85 SNMPv3 (Trap) Entry Option Window

(d) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Inform)

Figure 4-86 SNMPv3 (Inform) Entry Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-66

NE SETUP

Table 4-23 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

SNMP Version

SNMPv1

Set SNMP Version for Trap.

SNMPv2c
SNMPv3
PDU Type

Trap

Available for all SNMP Versions.

Inform

SNMPv1 cannot select Inform.

IP Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Enter the destination IP Address of Trap.

UDP Port

1 to 65535

Set UDP Port of Trap. [default: 162]

Community Name

(text field)

Enter Community Name of the Trap within one to 31


characters long. This Community Name must be the
same on both SNMP Server and Agent.

Security Level

NoAuthNoPriv

Allows a user to log in without authentication and


encryption.

AuthNoPriv

A user needs authentication but no encryption to log


in. Selecting this option enables Auth Algorithm
radio button below.

AuthPriv

A user needs authentication and data are encrypted


by DES or AES. Selecting this option enables Priv
Algorithm radio button below.

SNMP Engine ID

(text field)

Assign a 16 byte value to an NE, which must be


unique within the same managed network.

Auth Algorithm

MD5

MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash


Algorithm for authentication and digital signature. In
order to detect the falsification of original data while
transmitting, the Hash is generated using the original
data, which is compared at both ends of communication path.

SHA

SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash


Algorithm for authentication and digital signature. In
order to detect the falsification of original data while
transmitting, the 160-bit Hash is generated using the
original data that is less than 2 64 bits which is compared at both ends of communication paths.

Auth Key

(read only)

Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public


key. To enter the Authentication Key, click Set Auth
Key button on the tool bar.

Priv Algorithm

DES

DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit


encryption key. The block size is 64 bits.

AES

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block encryption. The block size is 128 bits, and
the length of the key is 128/192/256 bits.

(read only)

Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy


Key, click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar.

Priv Key

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-67

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-87 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
newly added SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.

Figure 4-88 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

This step ends the procedure.


(2) Modify SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 4-21
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
SNMP Trap Entry No.

Figure 4-89 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-68

NE SETUP

The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.


4. Modify parameters by referring to Table 4-23 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters:

Figure 4-90 SNMP Trap Entry Option Window


5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-91 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the modified SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.

Figure 4-92 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-69

(3) Delete SNMP Trap Entry


Procedure 4-22
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click Delete SNMP Trap Entry tool button on the tool bar.
SNMP Trap Entry No.

Figure 4-93 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

The Delete SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.


4. From the drop-down list, select the No. of SNMP Trap Entry to be removed, and
click the OK button.

Figure 4-94 Delete SNMP Trap Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-95 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-70

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-96 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected SNMP Trap Entry information has been removed from the display.

Figure 4-97 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

This step ends the procedure.

4.5.2.4 NTP
Procedure 4-23
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the NTP link.

NTP

Figure 4-98 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)

The NTP Setting box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-71

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-99 NTP Setting Option Window

Table 4-24 NTP Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

NTP

Enable

Enable/Disable the NTP Protocol on the equipment.

Disable
NTP Server Mode

Multicast

Specify the NTP Server mode.

Unicast
Disabled
NTP Client Mode

Multicast

Specify NTP Client mode.

Unicast
Disabled
Stratum

2 to 15

Set Stratum level of the NTP Time Packets. The


lowest Stratum should be received in NTP PDU plus
1.

Multicast Port

Bridge1

Select a port to output the Multicast Time information.

Bridge2
NE2
Multicast Interval

16 to 131072s

Select Multicast Interval. [unit: second]

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-72

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-100 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm the displayed NTP configuration.

Figure 4-101 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 4-102 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-73

4.5.2.5 NTP Server Address


This operation allows a user to register/modify/delete the NTP Server and its
information.
(1) Register NTP Server Address
Procedure 4-24
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.

No. of NTP Servers

Figure 4-103 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.


4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-104 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-74

NE SETUP

Table 4-25 NTP Server Address Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

IP Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Enter the IP Address of the upper NTP Server.

NTP Version

Specify the NTP massage version.

4
Poll Time

16 to 131072

Set the interval for polling NTP Server. [unit: second


(one hour); default: 3600 sec]

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-105 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the newly added NTP Server Address information is displayed.

Figure 4-106 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-75

(2) Modify NTP Server Address


Procedure 4-25
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.
No. of NTP Servers

Figure 4-107 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.


4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter. Modify parameters:

Figure 4-108 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-76

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-109 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the modified NTP Server Address information is displayed.

Figure 4-110 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

This step ends the procedure.

(3) Clear NTP Server Address


Procedure 4-26
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-77

3. Click Clear NTP Server button on the tool bar.


Clear NTP Server

Figure 4-111 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

The Clear NTP Server option window appears.


4. From No. drop-down list, select the number of target NTP Server Address, and
the click the OK button:

Figure 4-112 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-113 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-78

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-114 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the selected NTP Server Address information has been removed.

Figure 4-115 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

This step ends the procedure.

4.5.2.6 FTP
Procedure 4-27
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-79

3. Click the FTP link.


FTP

Figure 4-116 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)

The FTP Setting option window appears.


4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-117 FTP Setting Option Window


Table 4-26 FTP Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

FTP

Always Enable

FTP is always in service.

Service Enable

Enable FTP service.

Service Disable

Disable FTP service.

TCP Port (Command)

1 to 65535

Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for incoming commands).


[default: 21]

TCP Port (Data)

1 to 65535

Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for outgoing commands)


[default: 20]

MAX Session

1 to 3

Specify the maximum number of user sessions at a time

Auto Stop

Enable

Auto Stop disconnects a session automatically if no


operation is carried out for 90 seconds.

Disable

FTP Server will not disconnect a session if a session has


no operation.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-80

NE SETUP

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-118 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm the displayed FTP information:

Figure 4-119 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 4-120 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-81

4.5.2.7 SFTP
Procedure 4-28
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the SFTP link.
SFTP

Figure 4-121 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP)


SFTP Setting option window appears.
4. Specify the values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-122 SFTP Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-82

NE SETUP

Table 4-27 SFTP Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

SFTP

Disable

Disables the SFTP service.

Enable

Enables the SFTP service.

Always Enable

Put the SFTP always in service.

Enable

Auto Disable disconnects a session automatically if no operation is carried


out for 90 seconds.

Disable

SFTP Server will not disconnect a session if a session has no operation.

Auto Disable

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-123 Information Dialog Box


Service Status Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed SFTP information.

Figure 4-124 Service State Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 4-125 Service State Setting Window (SFTP)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-83

4.5.2.8 HTTP
Procedure 4-29
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the HTTP link.
HTTP

Figure 4-126 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)

The HTTP Setting option window appears.


4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-127 HTTP Setting Option Window


Table 4-28 HTTP Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

HTTP

Enable (Running)

Enable HTTP service.

Disable (Stopped)

Disable HTTP service.

1 to 65535

Set TCP Port of HTTP Server. [default: 80]

TCP Port

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-84

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-128 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm the displayed HTTP information:

Figure 4-129 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 4-130 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-85

4.5.2.9 HTTPS
Procedure 4-30
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting.
The Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the HTTPS link.
HTTPS

Figure 4-131 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)

The HTTS Setting option window appears.


4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-132 HTTPS Setting Option Window


Table 4-29 HTTPS Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

HTTP

Refer to Table 4-28 HTTP Setting Parameters.

TCP Port
HTTPS

TCP Port

Enable

Puts HTTPS Server into service.

Disable

Disables HTTPS service.

1 to 65535

Set TCP Port of HTTPS Server. [default: 443]

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-86

NE SETUP

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-133 Information Dialog Box

The Service Status Setting window updates the information.


6. Confirm the displayed HTTPS information:

Figure 4-134 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 4-135 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-87

4.5.3 RADIUS Setting


Following provides the settings of Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
Server.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
RADIUS Setting
Specifies the method of authentications at login.
RADIUS Server Setting
Specifies the setting values to User Service Server.
Clear RADIUS Server
Removes the specified settings of RADIUS Server.

(1) RADIUS Setting


Procedure 4-31
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS link.
RADIUS link

Figure 4-136 RADIUS Setting Window


RADIUS Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-88

NE SETUP

4. Specify the values, then click the OK button:

Figure 4-137 RADIUS Setting Option Window


Table 4-30 RADIUS Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Timeout

1 to 60

Specifies a period to expire the Accept-Request message. [unit: second[

Retry Count

0 to 5

Specifies the number of times to resend the Accept-Request messages.

Default
Permissions

Operator

Specifies the privilege levels to vendor-specific messages that do not have


the authentication information.

CONFIG
ADMIN
Deny Login

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-138 Information Dialog Box


6. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.

Figure 4-139 RADIUS Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-89

(2) RADIUS Server


Procedure 4-32
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS Server No. link.
RADIUS Server No. link

Figure 4-140 RADIUS Setting Window


RADIUS Server Setting option window for the selected Server appears.
4. Click the Set Secret Key tool button.
Set Secret Key button

Figure 4-141 RADIUS Server Setting Option Window

The Set Secret Key option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-90

NE SETUP

5. Enter the password as the authentication key to RADIUS:

Figure 4-142 Set Secret Key Option Window

i) Enter a new password to New Secret Key entry field.


ii) Enter the same password to Re-Enter entry field for confirmation.
iii) Click the OK button. The Set Secret Key option window disappears.
6. In the RADIUS Server Setting option window, specify the values.

Figure 4-143 RADIUS Server Setting Option Window


Table 4-31 RADIUS Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

IP Address

x.x.x.x

Enter the IP Address of the RADIUS Server.

Port No.

1 to 65535

Enter the number of Port connecting for authentication.

Encryption
Method

User

Communication with a share key of authentication by the


external server. (RADIUS)

CHAP

MD5 with a shared key of the authentication by the external


server (RADIUS).

(read only)

Indicates the authentication key to RADIUS that is specified by


the Set Secret Key option.

Secret Key

7. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-91

8. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-144 Information Dialog Box


9. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.

Figure 4-145 RADIUS Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-92

NE SETUP

(3) Clear RADIUS Server


Procedure 4-33
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The
RADIUS Setting window appears.
3. Click the Clear RADIUS Server tool button.
Clear RADIUS Server button

Figure 4-146 RADIUS Setting Window


Clear RADIUS Server option window appears.
4. Select the target RADIUS Server number from the No. drop-down list, then click
the OK button.

Figure 4-147 Clear RADIUS Server Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-93

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-148 Confirmation Dialog Box


6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-149 Information Dialog Box

The RADIUS Setting window updates the formation.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 4-150 RADIUS Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-94

NE SETUP

4.6 Register NE Configuration


4.6.1 Easy Setup Wizard
The Easy Setup Wizard navigates a user to make a faster and easier way of
provisioning the equipment, which is available at initially powering on. The Easy
Setup Wizard supports the following operations:
Easy Setup
Settings of NE Name, Switch Group (System structure) and guide to other setups.
MODEM Setup
Settings for Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, and RF Frequency
regarding Radio.
AMR Setup
Settings for AMR range and E1/STM-1 mapping.
Management Setup
Settings for IP address, Subnet mask and default gateway for NE.
TDM Setup
Setting of TDM cross-connect.
ETH Setup
Settings of VLAN service.
PWE Setup
Settings of TDM PWE (SAToP) function.

4.6.1.1 Easy Setup


The Easy Setup is a wizard that navigates a user to set up the basic configurations.
For traffic cards, configuration of 1+1 Hot Standby / Twin Path, 1+0 XPIC, 1+1 Hot
Standby XPIC (Master/Slave), and 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master/Slave) can be set
here by following the appropriate sequences.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-95

Procedure 4-34

Set Up MC-M Card(s)

Following procedure is required where the MC-M has the redundant option.
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Easy Setup.
The Easy Setup window appears.
3. Click Setup button.
Setup button

Figure 4-151 Easy Setup Window

The Easy Setup Step1 window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-96

NE SETUP

4. Enter the equipment name, then click the Next button.

enter equipment name

Next button

Figure 4-152 Easy Setup Step1 Window

The Easy Setup Step2 window appears.


NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-32 Easy Setup Step1 Parameter

NWD-118790-04E

Parameter

Value/Description

Equipment Name

1 to 32 characters long.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-97

5. Select MC-M to enter the card name. When installing two MC-M Cards, enter

both here.
Clicking the Auto Detect button detects the mounted cards to fill in the blank
slots automatically.
Auto Detect button
Card Slot for MC-M (2)
Card Slot for MC-M (1)

Next button

Figure 4-153 Easy Setup Step2 Window


6. Click the Next button.

The Easy Setup Step3 window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-98

NE SETUP

7. Click the Next button again.

Next button

Figure 4-154 Easy Setup Step3 Window

The Easy Setup Step4 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-99

8. The Easy Setup Step4 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values of parameters, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-155 Easy Setup Step4 Window (example: 1+1 Hot Standby)

9. The Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-156 Warning Dialog Box

While in the process, Easy Setup indicator appears.

Figure 4-157 Easy Setup (Under execution...) Indicator

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-100

NE SETUP

10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK

button to proceed.

Figure 4-158 Information Dialog Box


MODEM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

Procedure 4-35

Set Up Interfacing Cards

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.


2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Easy Setup.
The Easy Setup window appears.
3. Click Setup button.
Setup button

Figure 4-159 Easy Setup Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-101

The Easy Setup Step1 window appears.


4. Enter the equipment name, then click the Next button.

enter equipment name

Next button

Figure 4-160 Easy Setup Step1 Window

The Easy Setup Step2 window appears.


NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-33 Easy Setup Step1 Parameter
Parameter

Value/Description

Equipment Name

1 to 32 characters long.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-102

NE SETUP

5. Enter the appropriate card name to each Card Slot, then click the Next button.

Clicking the Auto Detect button detects the mounted cards to fill in the blank
slots automatically.

Card Slots

Auto Detect button

Next button

Figure 4-161 Easy Setup Step2 Window

The Easy Setup Step3 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-103

6. Register the configuration type:


Switch Group Configuration

Next button

Figure 4-162 Easy Setup Step3 Window (Example: 1+1 Hot Standby)

For 1 + 0 System (No Protection), uncheck (remove a tick from) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP.
For 1 + 1 Hot Standby System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-down list.
For 1 + 1 Twin Path System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list.
For 1 + 0 XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the target
SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.
For 1 + 1 Hot Standby XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box
of the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby XPIC (Master) or 1+1
Hot Standby XPIC (Slave)

For 1 + 1 Twin Path XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master) or 1+1 Hot
Standby XPIC (Slave)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-104

NE SETUP

7. When completed, click the Next button. The Easy Setup Step4 window

appears.
8. The Easy Setup Step4 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values of parameters, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-163 Easy Setup Step4 Window (example: 1+1 Hot Standby)

The Warning dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-105

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-164 Warning Dialog Box

While in the process, Easy Setup indicator appears.

Figure 4-165 Easy Setup (Under execution...) Indicator


10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK

button to proceed.

Figure 4-166 Information Dialog Box


MODEM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-106

NE SETUP

4.6.1.2 MODEM Setup


Procedure 4-36

Launch the MODEM Setup wizard if it is not displayed:


i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select MODEM
Setup. The MODEM Setup window appears.
1. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Set values

Figure 4-167 MODEM Setup Step1 Window (Example: 1+0 System)

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-107

Table 4-34 Detailed MODEM Setting of SW/XPIC GRP or Slot Unit Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Channel Spacing

7MHz

Specify the radio channel spacing.

14MHz
28MHz
56MHz
Reference Modulation

QPSK

Select a reference modulation from the list.

16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
Radio Mode

High Capacity
High System
Gain

High System Gain can be selected when the Channel


Spacing is set to 28MHz or higher.

E1 Mapping [CH]

0 to 152

Specify the number of E1 Channels for mapping. The


number of channels must not exceed the limitation of the
specified modulation.

STM-1 Mapping [CH]

0 to 2

Specify the number of STM-1 Channels for mapping.

ETH Bandwidth [Mbps]

(read only)

The value is automatically calculated.

TX RF Frequency [MHz]

Set the frequency at output.

RX RF Frequency [MHz]

Set the frequency at input.

Frame ID

1 to 32

Set the Frame ID.

TX Power Control

ATPC

Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control.

MTPC

Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.

Not Used

This option is enabled when the MODEM configures


2(1+0 System) or 1+0 XPIC system.

Radio Traffic
Aggregation

Radio GRP

To assign the Radio LAG, select Radio GRP.


Up to 8 MODEMs can be assigned to one Radio GRP.

2. When completed, click the Next button. MODEM Setup Step2 window

appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-108

NE SETUP

3. The MODEM Setup Step2 window indicates the modified parameters in the
blue fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-168 MODEM Setup Step2 Window (Example: 1+0 System)


Information dialog box appears.
4. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-169 Information Dialog Box


AMR Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.3 AMR Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-109

4.6.1.3 AMR Setup


Procedure 4-37

Launch the AMR Setup wizard if it is not displayed:


i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select AMR
Setup. The Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup window appears.
1. Click the Setup tool button.
Setup button

Figure 4-170 Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup Window


AMR Setup Step 1 window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-110

NE SETUP

2. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:


Set values

Next button

Figure 4-171 AMR Setup Step1 Window (Example: 1+0 System)

Click the AMR Mode radio button to enable the options.


Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking its/their
Used radio button(s).
Table 4-35 AMR Configuration
Parameter

Value

Description

AMR Operation

AMR Mode

Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.

Non Operation

Disable AMR function.

QPSK

Data Transmission for 1 time is 4 values (2 bits)

16QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 16 values (4 bits)

32QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 32 values (5 bits)

64QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)

128QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)

256QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)

AMR Range

NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is


specified by the Radio Configuration.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-111

3. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Setup Step2 window appears.
4. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
set values

Next button

Figure 4-172 AMR Setup Step2 Window (Example: 1+0 System)

Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.
For the STM-1 Through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capacity of
Ethernet Bandwidth is calculated automatically.
Table 4-36 E1 Mapping
Parameter

Value

Description

E1 Mapping

QPSK

Select following items:

16QAM

E1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 152]

32QAM
64QAM

STM-1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 2]


ETH Bandwidth is calculated from E1 and STM-1
Mappings.

128QAM
256QAM

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-112

NE SETUP

5. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Setup Step3 window appears.
6. The AMR Setup Step3 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-173 AMR Setup Step3 Window (Example: 1+0 System)


7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-174 Information Dialog Box

The Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-113

8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 4-175 Easy Setup Wizard AMR Setup Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-114

NE SETUP

4.6.1.4 Management Setup


NOTE: If Warning dialog box appears, click the Maintenance tool button on the
WebLCT tool bar, to put the service into the Maintenance Mode.
Maintenance button

Figure 4-176 WebLCT Main Window (Maintenance Tool Button)


Procedure 4-38

Launch the Management Setup option window if it is not displayed:


i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select
Management Setup. The Management Setup option window appears.
1. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-177 Management Setup Option box

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-115

Table 4-37 FTP Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

IP Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Enter the IP Address of the NMS Port.

Subnet Mask

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Enter the Subnet Mask of NMS Port.

Default Gateway

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Enter the Default Gateway IP Address.

Yes

Use NMS Port (for root NE only).

No

Not to use NMS Port.

IP Address Setting (Bridge1)

NMS Port Setting


Connect NMS Port to NMS

2. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.


3. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-178 Warning Dialog Box

The Management Setup option window updates the information.


4. Click the OK button to proceed.

OK button

Figure 4-179 Management Setup Option Window

TDM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.5 TDM Setup.


This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-116

NE SETUP

4.6.1.5 TDM Setup


Procedure 4-39

Launch the TDM Setup wizard if it is not displayed:


i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select TDM
Setup. The Easy Setup Wizard - TDM Setup window appears.
1. Click the Setup tool button.
Setup button

Figure 4-180 Easy Setup Wizard - TDM Setup Window


TDM Setup window appears.
2. Click the Add More XC tool button.
Add More XC button

Figure 4-181 TDM Setup Window

The TDM Setup (TDM XC Configuration) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-117

3. Enter the Service Name, and specify the appropriate value to each parameter.

Figure 4-182 TDM Setup (TDM XC Configuration) Option Window


4. When completed, click the OK button. TDM Setup (TDM XC Service
Configuration List) window appears.
5. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-183 TDM Setup (TDM XC Service Configuration List) Window


Warning dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-118

NE SETUP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-184 Warning Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-185 Information Dialog Box

NOTE: Change E1 Port usage to enable the E1 interface.


ETH Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 4.6.1.6 ETH Setup.
This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-119

4.6.1.6 ETH Setup


Procedure 4-40

Launch the ETH Setup wizard if it is not displayed:


i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select ETH
Setup. The ETH Setup E-Line Service Configuration window appears.
1. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the Next button.

Next button

Figure 4-186 ETH Setup E-Line Service Configuration Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-120

NE SETUP

Table 4-38 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

VLAN ID

1 to 4094

Specify an ID of VLAN.

VLAN Service Name

(text field)

Enter the service name of VLAN. Valid value is 1 to 32


characters long.

Service Type

EPL

EPL (Ethernet Private Line) is a data service defined by


the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a point-to-point
Ethernet connection between a pair of dedicated UserNetwork Interfaces (UNIs), with a high degree of
transparency.
EPL service is specified using an E-Line service type,
with an expectation of low frame delay, frame delay
variation and frame loss ratio. EPL is implemented as a
point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC), which,
unlike Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL), does not
allow for Service Multiplexing, i.e., a dedicated UNI
(physical interface) is used to accept all service frames
and to map them to a single EVC (a.k.a. All-to-one
bundling).
Due to a high degree of transparency, EPL is often used
to provide point-to-point Transparent LAN Service (TLS),
where the Service Frames header and payload are
identical at both the source and destination UNI. EPL is
not fully transparent, as it must filter 802.3x Pause
frames.

EVPL

EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) is a data service


defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a pointto-point Ethernet connection between a pair of UserNetwork Interfaces (UNIs).
EVPL service is specified using an E-Line service type,
very similar to a Ethernet Private Line (EPL) service, via a
point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC).
However, unlike EPL, EVPL allows for Service
Multiplexing, i.e., multiple EVCs or Ethernet services per
UNI.
Other difference between the EVPL and EPL is the
degree of transparency - while EPL is highly transparent,
filtering only the Pause frames, EVPL is required to either
peer or drop most of the Layer 2 Control Protocols.

The E-LAN Service Configuration window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-121

2. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-187 ETH Setup E-LAN Service Configuration

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-122

NE SETUP

Table 4-39 E-LAN Service Configuration Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

VLAN ID

1 to 4094

Specify an ID of VLAN.

VLAN Service Name

(text field)

Enter the service name of VLAN. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters


long.

Service Type

EP-LAN

EP-LAN (Ethernet Private LAN) is a Metro Ethernet service type


defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement the multipoint-to-multipoint
Ethernet virtual connections (EVC), multiple locations can be
interconnected using an EPLAN service. However, each location
can be a member of one and only one EVC. If a given location
requires connection to a second EVC, it will require the second
UNI.
Because there is only one EVC per UNI, the EVC cannot be seen
by the customer (e.g., an 802.1p VLAN tag is invisible).

EVP-LAN

EVP-LAN (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN) is a Metro Ethernet


service type defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement the multipoint-to-multipoint
Ethernet virtual connections (EVC), this service provides Metro
Ethernet with a multipoint service that can support multiple
overlapping closed-user groups. For example, a district school
system with elementary, middle, and high schools could put on of
the high schools on one EVC, all of the middle schools on a second
EVC, and all of the elementary schools on a third EVC, using
EPLAN services at each school. The district data center and
administrative offices could have EVPLAN service and be made a
member of all three EVCs without the need for three UNIs.
Because there are multiple EVCs per UNI in an EVPLAN service,
the EVCs must be visible to the customer. To do this, the service
provider expects customer traffic to have an appropriate 802.1p
VLAN tag when submitted. The network will also deliver tagged
traffic to that location so that the customer knows which EVC traffic
is arriving from.

Warning dialog box appears.


3. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-188 Warning Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-123

4. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-189 Information Dialog Box

The ETH Setup window appears.

Figure 4-190 Easy Setup Wizard ETH Setup Window

This step ends the procedure.

4.6.1.7 PWE Setup


Procedure 4-41

Launch the PWE Setup wizard if it is not displayed:


i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select PWE
Setup. The Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-124

NE SETUP

1. Click the Setup tool button.


Setup button

Figure 4-191 Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup Window

NOTE: MSE-A can be registered to Slot 11 only.


PWE Setup Step 1 window appears.
2. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, and click the Next button:

Figure 4-192 PWE Setup Step 1 Window


Table 4-40 PWE Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Service Name

(text field)

Enter the service name of PWE. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters long.

PWE Setup Step 2 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-125

3. Specify parameters, then click the Next button.

Next button

Figure 4-193 PWE Setup Step1 Window


Table 4-41 PWE Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Jitter buffer

2 [ms]

Select the Jitter Buffer size.

4 [ms]

e.g., 8 [ms] is for 4 ms Jitter Buffer.

8 [ms]
16 [ms]
32 [ms]
64 [ms]
128 [ms]
PWE Clock
Mode

ACR

Sets Adaptive Clock Recovery for TDM synchronization source


clock to transmit.

NE Clock

Uses NE clock for TDM synchronization source clock to transmit.

Sync E1

Uses recovered clock of E1 Port (loop timing) for TDM


synchronization source clock to transmit.

Destination
MAC Address

(entry filed)
ff.ff.ff.ff.ff.ff

Enter the MAC Address of opposing MSE-A (display to PWE Setup


window) or the Broadcast Address.

VLAN ID

1 to 4094

Enter the ID of VLAN.

ECID

1 to 1048575

Enter the ID of PWE.

4. PWE Setup Step3 window appears indicating the entered values.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-126

NE SETUP

5. Check (leave a tick in) the Enable E1 CH / ETH Port Usage check box, and click
the Next button.
Enable E1 CH / ETH Port Usage check box

Next button

Figure 4-194 PWE Setup Step3 Window


6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-195 Warning Dialog Box

While in progress, the progress bar appears.

Figure 4-196 PWE Setup Progress Bar

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-127

7. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to

proceed.

Figure 4-197 Information Dialog Box

The Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup window updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 4-198 Easy Setup Wizard PWE Setup Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-128

NE SETUP

4.6.2 Equipment Setup


The Equipment Setup allows more detailed settings than those done by the Easy
Setup Wizard. Some parameters are included in the Easy Setup Wizard.
Equipment Configuration
Specifies NE Name, Switch Group.
Radio Configuration
Specifies Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, RF Frequency for Radio.
AMR Configuration
Specifies the mode type and range for AMR.
Network Management Configuration
Specifies an IP Address of each port and functions.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-129

4.6.2.1 Equipment Configuration


Procedure 4-42

For MC-M Card(s)

Following procedure is required where the MC-M has the redundant option.
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window

appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-199 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window


Equipment Configuration Step1 window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-130

NE SETUP

4. Enter the equipment name to Equipment Name field, then click the Next button.

Equipment Name

Next button

Figure 4-200 Equipment Configuration Step1 Window

NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-42 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Equipment Name

(text field)

Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32


characters long.

Equipment Configuration Step2 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-131

5. Select to fill in a card name for each slot.

Clicking the Auto Detect button retrieves names of cards that are currently
mounted.
Auto Detect button

Next button

Figure 4-201 Equipment Configuration Step2 Window

6. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration Step3

window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-132

NE SETUP

7. Click the Next button again to proceed:

Next button

Figure 4-202 Equipment Configuration Step3 Window

Equipment Configuration Step4 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-133

8. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK

button.

OK button

Figure 4-203 Equipment Configuration Step4 Window (example: 1+1 TP)


9. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-204 Warning Dialog Box


Easy Setup indicator appears while in progress.

Figure 4-205 Easy Setup Indicator

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-134

NE SETUP

10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK

button to proceed.

Figure 4-206 Information Dialog Box


11. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window updates the

information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.

Figure 4-207 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window (example)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-135

Procedure 4-43

For Interfacing Card(s)

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.


2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window

appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-208 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window


Equipment Configuration Step1 window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-136

NE SETUP

4. Enter the equipment name to Equipment Name field, then click the Next button.

Equipment Name

Next button

Figure 4-209 Equipment Configuration Step1 Window

NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for
a user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-43 Setting of NE Name Parameter
Parameter

Value

Description

Equipment Name

(text field)

Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32


characters long.

Equipment Configuration Step2 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-137

5. Select to fill in a card name for each slot.

Clicking the Auto Detect button retrieves names of cards that are currently
mounted.
Auto Detect button

Next button

Figure 4-210 Equipment Configuration Step2 Window

6. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration Step3

window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-138

NE SETUP

7. Using drop-down lists in MODME / STM SW / XPIC GRP Configuration option

box, select the configuration type:


Switch Groups

Next button

Figure 4-211 Equipment Configuration Step3 Window (selecting 1+1 TP)

For 1 + 0 System (No Protection), uncheck (remove a tick from) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP.
For 1 + 1 Hot Standby System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-down list.
For 1 + 1 Twin Path System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list.
For 1 + 0 XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the target
SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.
For 1 + 1 Hot Standby XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box
of the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Hot Standby XPIC (Master) or 1+1
Hot Standby XPIC (Slave)

For 1 + 1 Twin Path XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path XPIC (Master) or 1+1 Hot
Standby XPIC (Slave)

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-139

8. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration Step4

window appears.
9. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK

button.

OK button

Figure 4-212 Equipment Configuration Step4 Window (example: 1+1 TP)


10. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-213 Warning Dialog Box


Easy Setup indicator appears while in progress.

Figure 4-214 Easy Setup Indicator

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-140

NE SETUP

11. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK

button to proceed.

Figure 4-215 Information Dialog Box


12. The Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration window updates the

information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.

Figure 4-216 Equipment Setup Equipment Configuration Window (example)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-141

4.6.2.2 Radio Configuration


Procedure 4-44
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Radio
Configuration. The Equipment Setup Radio Configuration window

appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-217 Equipment Setup Radio Configuration Window (example)


Radio Configuration Step1 window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-142

NE SETUP

4. Specify parameters in New Setting option box:

New Setting

Next button

Figure 4-218 Radio Configuration Step 1 Window (example: 1+1 HS)

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-143

Table 4-44 Detailed MODEM Setting of SW/XPIC GRP or Slot Unit Parameters
Parameter

Value

Channel Spacing

7MHz

Description
Specify the radio channel spacing.

14MHz
28MHz
56MHz
Reference Modulation

QPSK

Select a reference modulation from the list.

16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
Radio Mode

High Capacity
High System
Gain

High System Gain can be selected when Channel


Spacing is set to 28MHz or higher.

E1 Mapping [CH]

0 to 152

Specify the number of E1 Channels for mapping. The


number of channels must not exceed the limitation of the
specified modulations.

STM-1 Mapping [CH]

0 to 2

Set the STM-1 Channel to specify the frequency function.

ETH Bandwidth [Mbps]

(read only)

Indicates the Ethernet bandwidth value that is


automatically calculated.

TX RF Frequency [MHz]

Set the RF Frequency at output.

RX RF Frequency [MHz]

Set the RF Frequency at input.

Frame ID

1 to 32

Set the Frame ID.

TX Power Control

ATPC

Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control

MTPC

Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.

Not Used

This option is enabled when the MODEM configures


2(1+0 System) or 1+0 XPIC system.

Radio Traffic Aggregation

Radio GRP

To assign the Radio LAG, select Radio GRP.


Up to 8 MODEMs can be assigned to one Radio GRP.

5. When completed, click the Next button. Radio Configuration Step2 window

appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-144

NE SETUP

6. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK

button.

OK button

Figure 4-219 Radio Configuration Step2 Window (example)


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-220 Information Dialog Box

The Radio Configuration window appears again.


8. Confirm the displayed radio configuration.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

4-145

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-146

NE SETUP

4.6.2.3 AMR Configuration


Procedure 4-45
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select AMR
Configuration. The Equipment Setup AMR Configuration window appears.
3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-221 Equipment Setup AMR Configuration Window


AMR Configuration Step1 window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-147

4. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:

Figure 4-222 AMR Configuration Step1 Window

Click AMR Mode radio button to enable the options.


Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking its/their
Used radio button(s).
Table 4-45 AMR Configuration
Parameter

Value

Description

AMR Operation

AMR Mode

Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.

Non Operation

Disable AMR function.

QPSK

Data Transmission for 1 time is 4 values (2 bits)

16QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 16 values (4 bits)

32QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 32 values (5 bits)

64QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)

128QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)

256QAM

Data Transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)

AMR Range

NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is


specified by the Radio Configuration.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-148

NE SETUP

5. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Configuration Step2 window

appears.
6. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:

Figure 4-223 AMR Configuration Step2 Window

Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.
For the STM-1 Through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capacity of
Ethernet Bandwidth is calculated automatically.
Table 4-46 E1 Mapping
Parameter

Value

Description

E1 Mapping

QPSK

Select following items:

16QAM

E1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 152]

32QAM
64QAM

STM-1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 2]


ETH Bandwidth is calculated from E1 and STM-1
Mappings.

128QAM
256QAM

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-149

7. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Configuration Step3 window

appears.
8. Confirm that the fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click the
OK button.

OK button

Figure 4-224 AMR Configuration Step3 Window

Information dialog box appears.


9. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-225 Information Dialog Box


AMR Configuration window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-150

NE SETUP

10. Confirm that all parameters are set.

Figure 4-226 AMR Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure.

4.6.2.4 Network Management Configuration


This menu allows a user to check and configure the network management parameters
of NEs to be managed by the network management system.
General Setting
In order to connect the iPASOLINK to NMS, execute the setting to use or not to use
the NMS Port, and assign the IP Address.
General Setting (Detail)
Setting for IP Address of each internal port (NE2, Inband Management VLAN) and
NE Branch (NMS/NE/MODEM)
Routing Setting
Configure the static route information.
IP Access Control Setting
This setting allows a user to filter IP packets on both the incoming and outgoing
interfaces. The filter can be effective on all the interfaces except Bridge, LCT Port,
NE2 Port and Inband Management VLAN.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-151

(1) General Setting


Procedure 4-46
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select General Setting. The General Setting window appears.
4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-227 General Setting Window


General Setting option window appears.
5. Specify parameters:

Figure 4-228 General Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-152

NE SETUP

Table 4-47 General Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

IP Address

x.x.x.x

Enter the IP Address of NMS Port.

Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Enter the Subnet Mask of NMS Port.

Default Gateway

x.x.x.x

Enter the IP Address of Default Gateway.

Yes

Use NMS Port.

No

Not to use NMS Port.

IP Address Setting (Bridge1)

NMS Port Setting


Connect NMS Port to NMS

6. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-229 Warning Dialog Box

The General Setting option window appears again.


8. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-230 General Setting Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-153

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-231 Information Dialog Box

The General Setting window appears again.


10. Confirm that all the parameters are set:

Figure 4-232 General Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to

exit from the Maintenance Mode.


12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(2) General Setting (Details)


Procedure 4-47
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-154

NE SETUP

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select General Setting (Detail). The General Setting window

appears.
4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-233 General Setting (Detail) Window

The General Setting (Detail) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-155

5. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 4-234 General Setting (Detail) Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-156

NE SETUP

NE2 Port Setting


Selecting Used enables remaining options.
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Selecting Used enables remaining options.
Ethernet Port Setting
Setting Usage to Used enables the remaining options.
NE Branch Setting
i) Click the target item. The option window to set IP Address and Subnet Mask
appears.
ii) Enter the addresses, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-235 Option Window for Setting Addresses


General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.

iii) Click the Bridge No. of the target item. General Setting (Detail) (NMS) option
window appears.
iv) Select a Bridge No., and click the OK button.

Figure 4-236 General Setting (Detail) (NMS) Window

The General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-157

v) Verify the settings:

Figure 4-237 General Setting (Detail) Option Window

vi) When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
vii) Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-238 Information Dialog Box

The General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-158

NE SETUP

NMS Port Setting / LCT Port Setting


Click the radio buttons for their usage.
Table 4-48 General Setting (Detail) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

NE2 Port IP Address

x.x.x.x

Enter the IP Address of NE2 Port when NE2 (RJ45) Port is


used for serial connection to other PASOLINK.

NE2 Port Usage

Used

Use NE2 Port. Selecting this option enables other NE2 Port
Setting parameters.

Not Used

Not to use NE2 Port.

19200

Specify the baud rate. [unit: bps]

NE2 Port Setting

NE2 Port Speed

9600
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Inband Management
VLAN Usage

Used

Use the Inband Management VLAN. Selecting this option


enables other Inband Management VLAN Setting options.

Not Used

Not to use the Inband Management VLAN.

VLAN ID

1 to 4094

Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Management VLAN.

CoS

0 to 7

Assign the priority level to L2 Frame in 802.1q CLAN tag.

IP Address

x.x.x.x

Enter the IP Address.

Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Enter the Subnet Mask.

Used

Selects to use the port.

Not Used

Selects not to use the port.

Enabled

Set to enable or disable the Autonegotiation function.

Ethernet Port Setting


Usage
Auto Negotiation

Disabled
Speed Status

(read only)

Indicates the current status.

Duplex Status

(read only)

Indicates the current mode.

Discovery Usage

Used

Set to use or not to use the Ethernet connection to search


the network access machinery.

Not Used

NE Branch Setting (see NE Branch Setting in Step5.


Branch

1 Branch
to
14 Branch

Specify the Branch Number. between 1 to 14.

Default Gateway

x.x.x.x

Enter the address of Default Gateway.

Bridge No.

(read only)

Indicates the assigned Bridge No.

Bridge IP Address

(read only)

Indicates the Bridge IP Address.

Bridge Subnet Mask

(read only)

Indicates the Bridge Subnet Mask.

Yes

Enables a connection to NMS.

No

Disables a connections to NMS.

Any

Allows LCT connecting to both Local and Remote NEs.

Only to Local NE

Allows LCT connecting only to the Local NE.

NMS Port Setting


Connect NMS Port to
NMS
LCT Port Setting
Restrict LCT
Connection

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-159

6. When completed, click the OK button of the General Setting (Detail) option
window. General Setting (Detail) window updates the information.
7. Confirm that all the parameters are set.

Figure 4-239 General Setting (Detail) Window


8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit

from the Maintenance Mode.


9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-160

NE SETUP

(3) Routing Setting


This operation specifies the static route for the particular network or IP Address.
(a) Add Routing Setting
Procedure 4-48
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
4. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 4-240 Routing Setting Window


Routing Setting option window appears.
5. Click the Add tool button on the tool bar.

Add button

Figure 4-241 Routing Setting Option Window

The Routing Setting (Add) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-161

6. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask Address, and Gateway Address, then click the
OK button.

Figure 4-242 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window

The Routing Setting option window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the newly added route information is displayed, then click the OK

button.

Figure 4-243 Routing Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-244 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-162

NE SETUP

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-245 Information Dialog Box

The Routing Setting window updates the information.


10. Confirm that the newly added route information is displayed.

Figure 4-246 Routing Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to

exit from the Maintenance Mode.


12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify Routing Setting


Procedure 4-49
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-163

4. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 4-247 Routing Setting Window


Routing Setting option window appears.
5. Click on the target IP Address to be modified.

Figure 4-248 Routing Setting Option Window


Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears.
6. Modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask and/or Gateway, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-249 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window

The Routing Setting option window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-164

NE SETUP

7. Confirm that modified route information, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-250 Routing Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-251 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-252 Information Dialog Box

The Routing Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-165

10. Confirm the display for the modified route information.

Figure 4-253 Routing Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to

exit from the Maintenance Mode.


12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete Routing Setting


Procedure 4-50
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
4. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Setup button

Figure 4-254 Routing Setting Window


Routing Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-166

NE SETUP

5. Click Delete button on the tool bar.


Delete button

Figure 4-255 Routing Setting Option Window


Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears.
6. Enter the target network address into the IP Address field, then click the OK

button.

Figure 4-256 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window

The Routing Setting option window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the selected network address has been removed, then click the OK

button.

Figure 4-257 Routing Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-167

Confirmation dialog box appears.


8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-258 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-259 Information Dialog Box

The Routing Setting window updates the information.


10. Confirm the display for the modified route information.

Figure 4-260 Routing Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to

exit from the Maintenance Mode.


12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-168

NE SETUP

(4) IP Access Control Setting


(a) Input Filter List Add Entry
Procedure 4-51
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Add Entry tool button on the tool bar.
Input Filter List tab
Add Entry button

Figure 4-261 IP Access Control Setting Window

The Input Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-169

5. Specify the filter condition:

Figure 4-262 IP Access Control Setting Input Filter Entry (Add) Window

Table 4-49 Input Filter Entry (Add) Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Entry No.

1 to 50

Specify the entry number.

Input Index

Any

Select the ingress port.

Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address

x.x.x.x

Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.

Source Subnet
Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the


incoming packets.

Protocol

Any

Selects no specific Protocol.

ICMP

Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.

TCP

Selects TCP/IP Protocol

UDP

Selects User Datagram Protocol

Other

Selecting Other here requires to set the Port Numbers.

Any

(Currently not supported)

Destination Port

1 to 65535
Action

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Permit

Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.

Deny

Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-170

NE SETUP

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-263 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm that the newly added filter information displayed.

Figure 4-264 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-171

(b) Input Filter List Modify Entry


Procedure 4-52
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Entry No. of the target.
Input Filter List tab

Entry Number(s)

Figure 4-265 IP Access Control Setting Window

The Input Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-172

NE SETUP

5. Specify the filter condition, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-266 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window

Table 4-50 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Entry No.

(read only)

Indicates the selected Entry No.

Input Index

Any

Selects the ingress port.

Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address

x.x.x.x

Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.

Source Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the


incoming packets.

Protocol

Any

Selects no specific Protocol.

ICMP

Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.

TCP

Selects TCP/IP Protocol

UDP

Selects User Datagram Protocol

Other

Selecting Other here requires to set the Port Numbers.

Any (check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific


port for the destination.

1 to 65535

Select a port for the destination.

Permit

Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.

Deny

Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

Destination Port

Action

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-173

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-267 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed.

Figure 4-268 IP Address Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-174

NE SETUP

(c) Input Filter List Delete Entry


Procedure 4-53
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Delete Entry tool button on the tool

bar.
Input Filter List tab
Delete Entry button

Figure 4-269 IP Access Control Setting Window

The Input Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears.


5. Enter the target Entry No., then click the OK button.

Figure 4-270 Input Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-175

Confirmation dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-271 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-272 Confirmation Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.

Figure 4-273 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-176

NE SETUP

(d) Input Filter List Modify Rule


Procedure 4-54
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Modify Rule tool button on the tool

bar.
Input Filter List tab
Modify Rule button

Figure 4-274 IP Access Control Setting Window

The Input Filter Rule option window appears.


5. Set the filter conditions:

Figure 4-275 Input Filter Rule Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-177

Table 4-51 Input Filter Rule Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Input Filter Rule

Enable

Enables the configured input filters.

Disable

Disables the configured input filters.

Permit

Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured


conditions.

Deny

Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured


conditions.

Default Action

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-276 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed

Figure 4-277 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-178

NE SETUP

(e) Forwarding Filter List Add Entry


Procedure 4-55
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Add Entry tool button on the

tool bar.
Forwarding Filter List tab

Add Entry button

Figure 4-278 IP Access Control Window

The Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-179

5. Set the filter conditions:

Figure 4-279 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Option Window

Table 4-52 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (1 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Entry No.

1 to 50

Enter the entry number.

Input Index

Any

Selects the ingress port.

Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Output Index

Any

Selects the egress port.

Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address

x.x.x.x

Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.

Source Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address


for output packets.

Destination IP Address

x.x.x.x

Specify the Destination IP Address to output


packets.

Destination Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP


Address for the output packets.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-180

NE SETUP

Table 4-52 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Protocol

Any

Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.

ICMP

Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.

TCP
UDP
Other
Source Port

Any

(Currently not supported.)

1 to 65535
Destination Port

Any

(Currently not supported.)

1 to 65535
Action

Permit

Forwards a packet that meets the conditions


above.

Deny

Discards a packet that meets the conditions


above.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-280 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm that the newly added filter information is displayed.

Figure 4-281 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-181

(f) Forwarding Filter List Modify Entry


Procedure 4-56
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Entry No. of the target:
Forwarding Filter List tab

Entry Number(s)

Figure 4-282 IP Access Control Setting Window


Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-182

NE SETUP

5. Modify the filter conditions:

Figure 4-283 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window

Table 4-53 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (1 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Entry No.

(read only)

Indicates the selected Entry No.

Input Index

Any

Selects the ingress port.

Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Output Index

Any

Selects the egress port.

Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address

x.x.x.x

Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.

Source Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address


for output packets.

Destination IP Address

x.x.x.x

Specify the Destination IP Address to output


packets.

Destination Subnet Mask

x.x.x.x

Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP


Address for the output packets.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-183

Table 4-53 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Protocol

Any

Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.

ICMP

Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.

TCP
UDP
Other
Source Port

Any

(Currently not supported.)

1 to 65535
Destination Port

Any

(Currently not supported.)

1 to 65535
Action

Permit

Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.

Deny

Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-284 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm the display for the modified filter conditions.

Figure 4-285 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-184

NE SETUP

(g) Forwarding Filter List Delete Entry


Procedure 4-57
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Delete Entry tool button on the

tool bar.
Forwarding Filter List tab
Delete Entry button

Figure 4-286 IP Access Control Setting Window


Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears.
5. Enter the Entry No. of the target, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-287 Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-185

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-288 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-289 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.

Figure 4-290 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-186

NE SETUP

(h) Forwarding Filter List Modify Rule


Procedure 4-58
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the

system into the Maintenance Mode.


3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.
4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Modify Rule tool button on the

tool bar.
Forwarding Filter List tab
Modify Rule button

Figure 4-291 IP Access Control Setting Window


Forwarding Filter Rule option window appears.
5. Modify the filter condition:

Figure 4-292 Forwarding Filter Rule Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
NE SETUP

4-187

Table 4-54 Input Filter Rule Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Forwarding Filter
Rule

Enable

Enables the configured forwarding filters.

Disable

Disables the configured forwarding filters.

Default Action

Permit

Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured conditions.

Deny

Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured conditions.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-293 Information Dialog Box

The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.


8. Confirm the display for the modified filter information.

Figure 4-294 IP Access Control Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
4-188/END

NE SETUP

This page is intentionally left blank.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-1

5. PROVISIONING
NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft Internet Explorer for the browsing
software as an example.

5.1 Overview
The setup procedures provided here are for further system fundamental configuration
after the equipment setup. The setting items are listed as follows:
MODEM Function Setting
Configures the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1 threshold, etc.,
for each selected MODEM.
ETH Function Setting
Configures the Ethernet port, VLAN ETH OAM, RSTP, QOS, link loss forwarding,
etc.
E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting
Configures the E1 port, STM-1 port and cross connect.
PWE Setting
Configures the TDM PWE (SAToP) function.
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting
Sets the internal clock, external clock, and timing source.
V.11/OW Setting
Configures the user interface of iPASOLINK (V.11,RS-232C) and OW buzzer.
Alarm/AIS Setting
Sets the alarm delay, severity, color and relevant settings of AIS.
PMON/RMON Setting
Sets the threshold of PMON (except Ethernet)/ RMON (Ethernet).
AUX Setting
Configures the relevant settings of the auxiliary (AUX).
For details, refer to the relevant sections accordingly.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-2

PROVISIONING

5.2 Set MODEM Function


Users can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1
threshold, etc., for each selected MODEM:
MODEM Port Setting
Specifies the port name of each MODEM.
Radio Switch Setting
Specifies the TX/RX switch priority that prevents from unnecessary switching.
TX Power Setting
Specifies the threshold of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
ALM Mode Setting
Specifies the ATPC power mode and ALM mode for ODU communication failure.
XPIC Setting
Specifies the XPIC configuration.
AMR Setting
Specifies the AMR Switching condition.

5.2.1 Set MODEM Ports


Specify the Port Name to each MODEM:
Procedure 5-1
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select MODEM Port Setting. The MODEM Port Setting

window appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM to configure:

Figure 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-3

MODEM Port Setting option window appears.


4. Assign the appropriate name to the MODEM:

Figure 5-2 MODEM Port Setting Option Window


Table 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameter
Parameter

Value

Description

Port Name

(text field)

Specify a Port Name. Valid value: one to 32 characters long.

MAC Header Compression

Enable

Enables to increase packet rates throughput on radio


transmission.

Disable

Disables the MAC Header Compression.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-3 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM Port Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm the displayed information.

Figure 5-4 MODEM Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-4

PROVISIONING

5.2.2 Set Radio Switch Parameters


Specify the TX/RX SW priority and TXSW locking usage, and TX SW reverse
function usage. This operation configures the following items:
TX SW Priority
Specifies the TX switch priority in transmit direction. (for Hot-Standby System only)
TX SW Lock-In Usage
Enabling this function prevents the system from causing TX switching repeatedly in
case of a cable problem between IDU and ODU.
TX SW Reverse Function Usage
This function enables to carry out the local TX switch if the opposite station detects
the TX transmit failure from the local station.
RX SW Priority
Specifies the RX switching priorities. (for Hot-Standby system and Twin-Path
system only)

Procedure 5-2
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select Radio Switch Setting. The Radio Switch Setting

window appears.
3. Click a desired SW GRP to configure:

Figure 5-5 Radio Switch Setting Window


Radio Switch Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-5

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-6 Radio Switch Setting Option Window


Table 5-2 Radio Switch Setting Parameter
Parameter

Value

Description

TX SW Priority

No. 1

Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1


whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.

Non Priority

This option sets Non-Revertive mode.

Used

Enables to lock the TX SW operations. Available only when


the TX SW Priority is set to No.1. If switching operations are
carried out for more than 10 times within 10 minutes, TX will
be locked on to No. 2, which will be released after 24 hours
when No. 1 recovers or has no failure.

Not Used

Disables to lock the TX SW operation.

Used

Enables the Reverse Function. Available only when the TX


SW Priority is set to Non Priority. If both ODUs at the local
site fail to receive signals from the opposite end, a silent
alarm is output to the opposite end to carry out the forced
switch replacing the working ODU to the standby ODY.

Not Used

Disables the Reverse Function.

No. 1

Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1


whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.

Non Priority

This option sets Non-Revertive mode.

Included Early
Warning

Includes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an


automatic switch.

Excluded Early
Warning

Excludes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an


automatic switch.

TX SW Lock-in Usage

TX SW Reverse
Function Usage

RX SW Priority

RX SW Condition Early
Warning

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-6

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-7 Information Dialog Box

The Radio Switch Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-8 Radio Switch Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-7

5.2.3 Set TX Power Parameters


Specify the thresholds of TX Power and RX Power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.

5.2.3.1 ATPC Mode


Procedure 5-3
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window

appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-9 TX Power Setting Window


TX Power Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-10 TX Power Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-8

PROVISIONING

Table 5-3 TX Power Setting Parameters (ATPC)


Parameter

Value

Description

ATPC Range (MAX)


ATPC Range (MIN)

Sets the maximum level of ODU TX Power for


ATPC Mode. [unit: dBm]
(Range of value depends on
the ODU type.)

MTPC TX Power

Sets the minimum level of ODU TX Power for


ATPC Mode.
Sets the threshold of RX Level for the opposite
site if it is in the MTPC mode.

RX Threshold

(Range of value depends on


the modulating method.)

Set the input threshold level for when the


opposite end is in ATPC Mode.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-11 Information Dialog Box

The TX Power Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-12 TX Power Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-9

5.2.3.2 MTPC Mode


Procedure 5-4
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window

appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-13 TX Power Setting Window


TX Power Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-14 TX Power Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-10

PROVISIONING

Table 5-4 TX Power Setting Parameters (MTPC)


Parameter

Value

Description

ATPC Range (MAX)

(Not editable)

ATPC Range (MIN)

(Not editable)

MTPC TX Power

5.0 to 23.0

Set the TX Power level in MTPC mode.

RX Threshold

90 to 30

Set the input threshold level for when the opposite


end is in ATPC Mode.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-15 Information Dialog Box

The TX Power Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-16 TX Power Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-11

5.2.4 Set ALM Mode


Specify the ATPC Power and ALM Mode in case IDU fails in communicating with
ODU.
Procedure 5-5
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select ALM Mode Setting. The ALM Mode Setting window

appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-17 ALM Mode Setting Window


ALM Mode Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-18 ALM Mode Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-12

PROVISIONING

Table 5-5 ALM Mode Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

ATPC Power Mode

MAX

Increases the TX Power to the maximum value.

MIN

Decreases the TX Power to the minimum value.

Hold

Holds the TX Power at the current value.

Mute

Mutes the TX Power if IDU fails in communicating with ODU.

Hold

Holds the TX Power if IDU fails in communicating with ODU.

ODU COMM ALM Mode

NOTE: When the MTPC Mode is selected, ATPC Power Mode option is disabled.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-19 Information Dialog Box

The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-20 ALM Mode Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-13

5.2.5 Set XPIC


Specify the ODU Operation against the LO REF condition.
Procedure 5-6
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select XPIC Setting. The XPIC Setting window appears.
3. Click a desired XPIC GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-21 XPIC Setting Window


XPIC Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-22 XPIC Setting Option Window

Table 5-6 XPIC Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

XPIC Condition - Local Fail

Mute

Enables the Mute Control against ODU [default]

REF LO. -> Self LO.

Suspends the XPIC function on MODEM, where


signals from ODU are output as they are.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-14

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-23 Information Dialog Box

The XPIC Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-24 XPIC Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-15

5.2.6 Set AMR


This procedure specifies conditions to carry out the AMR switching operation where
the AMR Mode is enabled. See 4.6.2.3 AMR Configuration for enabling AMR.
Procedure 5-7
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select AMR Setting. The AMR Setting window appears.
3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-25 ALM Mode Setting Window


AMR Setting option window appears.
4. Select a condition to carry out AMR Switch operation:

Figure 5-26 AMR Setting Option Window


Table 5-7 AMR Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

AMR Switch condition

CNR + RSL

Carries out AMR by CNR when the modulation scheme is


downward; or by RSL when the modulation scheme is the upward
(e.g., QPSK to 256QAM), AMR is carried out by RSL). [default]

CNR

Carries out AMR by CNR.

CNR (Carrier Noise Ratio): Automatically operates AMR If the noise within the carrier wave
increases.
RSL (Receive Signal Level): Operates AMR the receiving power changed.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-16

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-27 Information Dialog Box

The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-28 ALM Mode Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-17

5.3 Set ETH Function


5.3.1 Overview
The ETH Function Setting provides the following options:
Bridge Setting
Bridge function is also known as the switching function, which enables the device in
the multiple network segments can communicate with each other. User can configure
the FDB (forward database) aging time, default VLAN ID and VLAN mode here.
ETH Port Setting
This function provides the abilities that configure the attributes of the Ethernet port
on the front panel of iPASOLINK, including port name, line speed, Mode, Flow
Control etc.
VLAN Setting
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) enables multiple devices that are separated
physically can communicate as they are located in a same broadcast domain and also
protect the data from sending to other domain even they may connect physically.
This function provides the abilities of creating, configuring and deleting the VLAN.
FDB Setting
iPASOLINK can learn the MAC address of the Ethernet frame dynamically and save
the port MAC address mapping information into FDB (Forwarding DataBase)
based on 802.1d for each VLAN. User can also add the static mapping information
manually by this function.
ETH OAM Setting
iPASOLINK supports Ethernet OAM function based on Y.1731 and 802.1ag, which
enables operator to measure the Ethernet link quality such as delay, throughput, jitter,
loss and so on, greatly help network operator in maintenance and troubleshooting.
RSTP Setting
iPASOLINK supports RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) which prevents from
layer 2 level link loop with a faster manner comparing to legacy STP protocol.
User can set the priority of the bridge; specify the role of the Ethernet port and other
parameters.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-18

PROVISIONING

ERP Setting
High-speed protection switch and load balancing are realized by G.8032 Ethernet
Ring Protection. The maintenance can be done with minimum service affecting by
the administrative operation, such as manual/forced switching.
Load balancing works under the normal operation, and the higher priority traffic
can be secured by QoS management.
Fast Switch-over (<50ms) with 3.3ms period, hardware based ETH-CC.
Administrative operation:
Forced switching
Manual switching
Revertive / Non-revertive
The combination of logical ring set-up and load balancing achieves double capacity
transmission.

Link Aggregation Setting


Link Aggregation achieves high capacity and resiliency transport with bundling
several radio links. The distribution algorithm distributes the packet according to:
L2 based: Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, Physical Port
ID.
L3&L4 based: Source & Destination IP, Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port
Number
Also, ETH Ports support Both of LACP and Non-LACP operation with carrier class
1:1 LACP Protection.
QoS/Classification Setting
iPASOLINK supports QoS control function that provides different priority to
different applications, users, or data flow or to guarantee a certain level of
performance to a data flow. User can configure Class Classification, Ingress Policer,
Egress QoS and SP, TDM E1 QoS on MODEM to realize differential service
strategy.
Filter Setting
This function provides layer2 filtering parameter database based user-plane
discarding filter for solving security issue.
Parameters: multiple combination of MAC DA/SA, CoS, Ether Type, VLAN ID
with "any" or "wildcard" description
Filter profile based easy to use configuration

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-19

L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting


L2CP Transparent transport function is useful for L2CP tunneling, especially MEF 9
Compliant ETH Private Line (EPL) Service. Transported L2CP protocols can be
specified by checking boxes independently.
Port Mirroring enables to monitor the traffic at another (mirrored) port without traffic
of source port interruption. Ingress, egress or both direction of the port to be mirrored
to the destination port can be specified
Port Isolate Setting
Port isolation can restrict the transmission even within the same VLAN. Ports which
are configured as port isolation cannot communicate with another same VLAN port.
Also, broadcast traffic is not transmitted. This function can protect the user traffic
from the attacks such as being executed from inside own network (same subnet).
LLF Setting
LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) is the function that mandatory shuts down the port on
the opposite device when local device detects unidirectional link problem.
Broadcast Storm Control Setting
This function discards flooding frames in a specific interface without transferring.
This function can set also flooding transferring control in unit of ETH port including
MODEM port. By specifying the bandwidth of broadcast frame, multicast frame, and
unknown address unicast frame collectively, frames beyond the specified band are
discarded at the circuit input.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-20

PROVISIONING

5.3.2 Bridge Setting


Procedure 5-8
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Bridge Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button on the tool bar.
Modify button

Figure 5-29 Bridge Setting Window


Bridge Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-30 Bridge Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-21

Table 5-8 Bridge Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Aging On/Off

On

Enables the FDB (Forwarding Data Base) to delete the learnt


MAC Address if it is not updated for a certain period specified
by the FDB Aging Time.

Off

Disables the Aging function.

FDB Aging Time

5 to 163680

Specifies the aging time period when the Aging function is


enabled. [unit: second]

GbE MAX Frame Size

64 to 9600

Specifies the maximum frame size for a GbE (Giga-bit


Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]

FE MAX Frame Size

64 to 2000

Specifies the maximum frame size for an FE (Fast Ethernet)


port. [unit: byte]

VLAN Mode

802.1q

Allows the port for different VLANs to communicate with each


other through a Layer-3 network device.

802.1ad

Allows the switches in a service provider network to


transparently carry customers Layer-2 control frames,
separate from the service providers traffic and from other
traffic in the service providers network.

Default VID

1 to 4094

Enter the default VID of the equipment. [default: 1]

Default VLAN TPID

8100 to
FFFF

Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value of VLAN.


[default: 0x8100]

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-31 Information Dialog Box


7. The Bridge Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

parameters.

Figure 5-32 Bridge Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-22

PROVISIONING

5.3.3 ETH Port Setting


Procedure 5-9
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH Port Setting. The ETH Port Setting window appears.
3. Click the desired Port No. to configure.

Figure 5-33 ETH Port Setting Window


ETH Port Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-34 ETH Port Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-23

Table 5-9 ETH Port Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Port Usage

Enable

Enable the port administratively.

Disable

Shut down the port administratively.

Port Name

(text field)

Enter the Ethernet Port name. Valid value is zero to 32 characters long.

Media Type

Electrical

(Not editable.)

Optical
Speed

Duplex

AUTO

Sets Autonegotiation to select the speed at establishing each link.


Selecting AUTO disables Duplex and MDI and MDIX options below.

10Mbps

Specifies 10 Mbit/s rate.

100Mbps

Specifies 100 Mbit/s rate.

1000Mbps

Specifies 1000 Mbit/s rate.

Half

Specifies the duplex mode. This option is disabled when the Speed
option selects AUTO.

Full
MDI and MDIX

Flow Control

MDI
MDIX

Specifies the port media type. This option is disabled when the Speed
option selects AUTO.

Enable

Enables the Flow Control function.

Disable

Disables the Flow Control function.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-35 Information Dialog Box

The ETH Port Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-36 ETH Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-24

PROVISIONING

5.3.4 VLAN Setting


5.3.4.1 VLAN List
(1) Add VLAN ID
Procedure 5-10
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the Add VLAN ID button on the tool bar.
VLAN List tab
Add VLAN ID button

Figure 5-37 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)

The Add VLAN ID option window appears.

4. Specify VLAN ID (for 802.1q) or S-VLAN ID (for 802.1ad) and VLAN Service
Name:

Figure 5-38 Add VLAN ID Option Window (example: 802.1q)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-25

Table 5-10 Add VLAN ID Parameters


Parameter

Value

VLAN ID

Description
[For 802.1q] Enter VLAN ID.

1 to 4094
S-VLAN ID
VLAN Service Name

[For 8021.ad] Enter S-VLAN ID.


(text field)

Enter VLAN Service Name. Valid value is one to


32 characters long.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-39 Information Dialog Box

The VLAN Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-40 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-26

PROVISIONING

5.3.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name


Procedure 5-11
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the target object under the VLAN Service
Name.
VLAN List tab

select a target object

Figure 5-41 VLAN Setting VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)


Modify VLAN Service Name option window appears.
4. Enter the modified name into the VLAN Service Name text box, then click the
OK button.

Figure 5-42 Modify VLAN Service Name Option Window (example: 802.1q)
Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-27

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-43 Information Dialog Box

The VLAN Setting window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-44 VLAN Setting Window (example: 802.1q)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-28

PROVISIONING

5.3.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID


Procedure 5-12
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the Delete VLAN ID button on the tool bar.
VLAN List tab
Delete VLAN button

Figure 5-45 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)

The Delete VLAN ID option window appears.


4. Enter the VLAN ID / S-VLAN ID or VLAN Service Name to be removed:

Figure 5-46 Delete VLAN ID Option Window VLAN ID (example: 802.1q)

Figure 5-47 Delete VLAN ID Option Window VLAN Service Name

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-29

5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-48 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-49 Information Dialog Box

The VLAN Setting window updates the information.


8. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-50 VLAN Setting Window VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-30

PROVISIONING

5.3.4.4 VLAN Setting


(1) Set VLAN ID (802.1q Mode)
Procedure 5-13
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN Setting tab, then click a port number (listed under the Port) to

register VLAN settings.


VLAN Setting tab
Port Numbers

Figure 5-51 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab


VLAN Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the selected

port type:
Port Type

Figure 5-52 VLAN Setting Option Window

NOTE: For MODEM, Trunk is the only choice to select.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-31

Port Type: Access

Figure 5-53 VLAN Setting Option Window Access

Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Access.
The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.
Incoming tagged frames are discarded at the ports selected here.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-32

PROVISIONING

Port Type: Tunnel

Figure 5-54 VLAN Setting Option Window Tunnel

Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Tunnel.
At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with any
VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID, which is
checked in the list.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-33

Port Type: Trunk

Figure 5-55 VLAN Setting Option Window Trunk

Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Trunk.
At the ports selected here, tagged frames with the VLAN IDs that are checked in
the list are allowed to pass through.
An untagged frame will be assigned with the VLAN ID of the selected VLAN in
UntagFrame Assignment column.
Other types of frames are discarded.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-34

PROVISIONING

Table 5-11 VLAN Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Port/VLAN Configuration

(read only)

Indicates the information of selected port.

VLAN Mode

802.1q

Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.

Port Type

Access

Allows untagged frames only to pass through.

Tunnel

Allows both untagged and tagged frames to pass through.

Trunk

Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass


through. An untagged frame will be assigned with the
specified VLAN ID.

X VLAN Assignment Clear

(button)

Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.

Enable

(check box)

Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.

UntagFrame Assignment
(Access Port)

(radio button)

Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged


frame.

VLAN Assignment

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-56 Information Dialog Box

The VLAN Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-57 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-35

(2) Set S-VLAN ID (802.1ad Mode)


Procedure 5-14
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Select the VLAN Setting tab, then click a port number (listed under the Port) to

register VLAN settings.


VLAN Setting tab
Port Numbers

Figure 5-58 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab


VLAN Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the selected

port type:
Port Type

Figure 5-59 VLAN Setting Option Window

NOTE: For MODEM, C-Bridge is the only choice to select.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-36

PROVISIONING

Port Type: C-Access

Figure 5-60 VLAN Setting Option Window C-Access

Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: C-Access.
The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.
Incoming tagged frames are discarded at the ports selected here.
Table 5-12 VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Port/VLAN Configuration

(read only)

Indicates the information of selected port.

VLAN Mode

802.1ad

Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.

Port Type

C-Access

Allows untagged frames only to pass through.

X VLAN Assignment Clear

(button)

Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.

Enable

(check box)

Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.

C-Frame Assignment
(C-Access Port)

(radio button)

Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged


frame.

VLAN Assignment

C-VLAN ID

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-37

Port Type: S-Trunk

Figure 5-61 VLAN Setting Option Window S-Trunk

Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: S-Trunk.
At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with any
VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID, which is
checked in the list.
Table 5-13 VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Port/VLAN Configuration

(read only)

Indicates the information of selected port.

VLAN Mode

802.1ad

Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.

Port Type

S-Trunk

Allows tagged and untagged frames to pass through.

X VLAN Assignment Clear

(button)

Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.

Enable

(check box)

Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.

C-Frame Assignment
(C-Access Port)

(radio button)

Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged


frame.

VLAN Assignment

C-VLAN ID

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-38

PROVISIONING

Port Type: C-Bridge


click the link

Figure 5-62 VLAN Setting Option Window C-Bridge

Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: C-Bridge.
At the ports selected here, tagged frames with S-VLAN ID that are checked in the
list will be allowed to pass through.
The C-Tagged frames will be assigned with an S-VLAN ID of the selected
VLAN in C-tagFrame Assignment column.
The other frames will be discarded.

i) To enter the C-VLAN ID, click the


Undefined link under the C-VLAN ID.
The C-VLAN ID option window
appears.
ii) Enter the ID or the appropriate value.
iii) Click the OK button. The VLAN Setting
option window updates the C-VLAN ID
Information.

Figure 5-63 Modify C-VLAN ID


Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-39

Figure 5-64 VLAN Setting Option Window

Table 5-14 VLAN Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Port/VLAN Configuration

(read only)

Indicates the information of selected port.

VLAN Mode

802.1ad

Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.

Port Type

C-Bridge

Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass


through. C-tagged frames will be assigned with a specified
VLAN-ID.

X VLAN Assignment Clear

(button)

Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.

Enable

(check box)

Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a VLAN
to assign the selected port type configuration.

C-Frame Assignment
(C-Access Port)

(radio button)

Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged


frame.

C-VLAN ID

Undefined

Indicates the specified values.

VLAN Assignment

All
1 to 40

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-40

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-65 Information Dialog Box

The VLAN Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-66 VLAN Setting Window VLAN Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-41

5.3.5 FDB Setting


5.3.5.1 FDB Setting
(1) FDB Setting (Equipment)
Procedure 5-15
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the FDB Setting tab, then click the Equipment link.
Equipment link

Figure 5-67 FDB Setting FDB Setting Tab


FDB Setting (Equipment) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-68 FDB Setting (Equipment) Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-42

PROVISIONING

Table 5-15 FDB Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Learning MAX
Size

1 to 32512

Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.

Learning Limit
Mode

Forward

If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address exceeds the
maximum size of FDB, the frame without learning this source MAC
Address will be forwarded.

Discard

If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address discarded.

Enable

Enables the equipment to send a trap if the Learning MAC Address


reaches the specified MAX size.

Disable

Disables the action above.

Learning Limit
Trap

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-69 Information Dialog Box

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-70 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-43

(2) FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Service Tab


Procedure 5-16
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the FDB Setting tab and Service tab, then click on the desired VLAN ID

number to configure.
FDB Setting tab
Service tab

Figure 5-71 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab


FDB Setting option window appears.
4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:

Figure 5-72 FDB Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-44

PROVISIONING

Table 5-16 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Learning MAX Size

0 to 32512

Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.

Learning Limit Mode

Forward

If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address exceeds


the maximum size of FDB, the frame without learning this source
MAC Address will be forwarded.

Discard

If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address discarded.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-73 Information Dialog Box

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-74 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-45

(3) FDB Setting Port Tab


Procedure 5-17
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the FDB Setting tab and Port tab, then click on the desired Port number to

configure.
FDB Setting tab
Port tab

Figure 5-75 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab


FDB Setting option window appears.
4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:

Figure 5-76 FDB Setting Option Window


Table 5-17 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Learning MAX Size (Port)

0 to 32384

Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-46

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-77 Information Dialog Box

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-78 FDB Setting Window FDB Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-47

5.3.5.2 Static Entry Setting


(1) Add Static Entry
Procedure 5-18
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Add button.

Figure 5-79 FDD Setting Window Static Entry Tab


Static Entry (Add) option window appears.
4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-80 Static Entry (Add) Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-48

PROVISIONING

Table 5-18 FDB Setting (Static Entry) Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Item

(Available Card)

Names of available (registered) cards are shown in the


drop-down list. Select the target card.

Port

(Available Port)

Available (registered) ports are shown in the drop-down


list. Select the target port.

MAC Address

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Enter the object MAC Address.

Enable

(radio button)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to assign the port to
the specified VLAN.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-81 Information Dialog Box

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-82 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-49

(2) Modify Static Entry


Procedure 5-19
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Entry No. of the target to modify.
Entry No.

Figure 5-83 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab


Static Entry (Static Entry No. xxx) option window for the selected object

appears.
4. Edit the MAC Address, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-84 Static Entry Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-50

PROVISIONING

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-85 Information Dialog Box

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-86 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-51

(3) Delete Static Entry


Procedure 5-20
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Delete button.

Figure 5-87 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab


Static Entry (Delete) option window for the selected object appears.
4. Check (leave a tick in) the check box of the target object, then click the OK

button.

Figure 5-88 Static Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-52

PROVISIONING

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-89 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-90 Information Dialog Box

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-91 FDB Setting Window Static Entry Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-53

5.3.6 ETH OAM Setting


OAM: Operation, Administration & Maintenance
MEG: Maintenance Entity Group
MEP: MEG End Point
MIP: MEG Intermediate Point

5.3.6.1 OAM MEG Setting


(1) Add OAM MEG Index
Procedure 5-21
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Add MEG button.

Figure 5-92 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab


OAM MEG Setting (Add) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-54

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-93 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Option Window


Table 5-19 OAM MEG Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

MEG Index

1 to 128

Set MEG Index number.

Maintenance Domain Name

(text field)

Short MA Name

(text field)

Maximum length in total of Maintenance Domain


Name and Short MA Name is 43 characters long.

MEG Level

0 to 7

ETH-CC Period

Specify the MEG level.

3.3ms
10ms

Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)


Message.

100ms
1s
10s
60s
CCM

CCM Priority

Enable

Enable to output/monitor CCM.

Disable

Disable to output/monitor CCM.

0 to 7

Specify the priority of the CCM

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-94 Information Dialog Box

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-55

The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-95 ETH ADM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-56

PROVISIONING

(2) Delete OAM MEG Index


Procedure 5-22
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Delete MEG button.

Figure 5-96 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab


OAM MEG Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Enter the MEG Index number of the target to be removed, then click the OK

button.

Figure 5-97 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-57

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-98 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-99 Information Dialog Box

The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the target OAM MEG has been removed.

Figure 5-100 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEG Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-58

PROVISIONING

5.3.6.2 OAM MEP Setting


(1) Add OAM MEP Index
Procedure 5-23
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the Add MEP button.

Figure 5-101 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab

OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-59

4. Add Peer MEP ID first:


I) Add Peer MEP button

i) Enable radio buttons

Figure 5-102 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window

i) From the list in the MEG Configuration option box, click the Enable radio
button of the target to select.
ii) Click Add Peer MEP button in the Peer MEP Configuration option box. The
Peer MEP Add option window appears.
iii) Enter the Peer MEP ID to add.

Figure 5-103 Peer MEP Add Option Box


Table 5-20 Peer MEP Add Option Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Peer MEP ID

1 to 8191

Assign MEP ID of the peer equipment

iv) Click the OK button. The Peer MEP Configuration option box updates the
entries.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-60

PROVISIONING

5. Specify the remaining parameters in the OAM MEP Setting (Add) option

window:

Figure 5-104 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window


Table 5-21 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

MEP Index

1 to 128

Specify a local MEP Index number.

MEP ID

1 to 8191

Specify an ID to the MEG Index.

Item

(Available Card)

Select the target card.

Port

(Available Port)

Select a port.

Enable

(radio button)

Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a


VLAN.

(radio button)

Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.

Add Peer MEP

(button)

Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.

Enable / Peer MEP ID

(radio button, list)

This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG


Configuration.

MEP Configuration

MEG Configuration
Enable
Peer MEP Configuration

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-61

6. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.


7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-105 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-106 Information Dialog Box

The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


9. Confirm that the newly added MEP Index information is displayed.

Figure 5-107 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-62

PROVISIONING

(2) Modify OAM MEP Index


Procedure 5-24
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the MEP Index number of the target to be

modified.

Figure 5-108 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab

OAM MEP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-63

4. Modify the parameters:

Figure 5-109 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Option Window


Table 5-22 OAM MEP Index Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

MEP Index

1 to 128

Specify a local MEP Index number.

MEP ID

1 to 8191

Specify an ID to the MEG Index.

Item

(Available Card)

Select the target card.

Port

(Available Port)

Select a port.

Enable

(radio button)

Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a


VLAN.

(radio button)

Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.

Add Peer MEP

(button)

Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.

Enable / Peer MEP ID

(radio button, list)

This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG


Configuration.

MEP Configuration

MEG Configuration
Enable
Peer MEP Configuration

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-64

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button.


Confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-110 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-111 Information Dialog Box


ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
8. Confirm that the modified parameter(s) is/are displayed.

Figure 5-112 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-65

(3) Delete OAM MEP Index


Procedure 5-25
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the Delete MEP button of the target to be

removed.
OAM MEP tab
Delete MEP button

Figure 5-113 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab

OAM MEP Setting (Delete) option window appears.


4. Select an MEP Index number of the target to be removed.

Figure 5-114 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-66

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

Figure 5-115 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-116 Information Dialog Box

NOTE: When the CCM Transmit / CCM Receive is enabled, the following error message
appears upon executing the deletion operation.

Figure 5-117 Error Message


To delete the MEP Index properly, disable the CCM Transmit / CCM Receive first,
using the procedure provided in (2) Modify OAM MEP Index.

When the operation is successfully completed, the ETH OAM Setting window
updates the information.
8. Confirm that the target OAM MEP Index has been removed.

Figure 5-118 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MEP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-67

5.3.6.3 OAM MIP Setting


(1) Add OAM MIP Index
Procedure 5-26
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click the Add MIP button.
OAM MIP tab

Add MIP button

Figure 5-119 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab

OAM MIP Setting (Add) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-68

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-120 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-23 OAM MIP Index Parameter


Parameter

Value

Description

MIP Index

1 to 128

Specify an MIP Index number.

MEG Level

0 to 7

Specify an MG Level to the MIP.

Item

(Available Card)

Select the target card.

Port

(Available Port)

Select a port.

Enable

(radio button)

Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.

MIP Configuration

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-69

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-121 Information Dialog Box


ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-122 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-70

PROVISIONING

(2) Modify OAM MIP Index


Procedure 5-27
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click on the MIP Index number of the target.

OAM MIP tab


MIP Index numbers

Figure 5-123 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab


OAM MIP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-71

4. Modify the parameter(s):

Figure 5-124 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Option Window

Table 5-24 OAM MIP Index Parameter


Parameter

Value

Description

MIP Index

1 to 128

Specify an MIP Index number.

MEG Level

0 to 7

Specify an MEG Level to the MIP.

Item

(Available Card)

Select the target card.

Port

(Available Port)

Select a port.

Enable

(radio button)

Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.

MIP Configuration

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-72

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-125 Information Dialog Box

he ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the information of modified parameter(s) is displayed.

Figure 5-126 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-73

(3) Delete OAM MIP Index


Procedure 5-28
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click on the Delete MIP button.
OAM MIP tab
Delete MIP button

Figure 5-127 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab


OAM MIP Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select the MIP Index number of the target, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-128 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-74

PROVISIONING

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-129 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-130 Information Dialog Box

The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


7. Confirm that the target OAM MIP Index has been removed.

Figure 5-131 ETH OAM Setting Window OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-75

5.3.7 RSTP Setting


STP: Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel function cannot be enabled on a port if it enables RSTP.

5.3.7.1 Modify RSTP Port


Procedure 5-29
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select RSTP Setting. The RSTP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify RSTP Port button.

Modify RSTP Port button

Figure 5-132 RSTP Setting Window

The RSTP Port Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-76

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-133 RSTP Port Setting Option Window


Table 5-25 RSTP Port Setting Parameter
Parameter

Value

Description

STP Mode

RSTP

Enables RSTP.

Disable

Disables RSTP.

Enable

(check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to select the target object.

Item

(read only)

Shows the information regarding the available cards.

Slot

(read only)

Port

(read only)

Port Name

(read only

STP Port Path Cst

Auto

Enables the function to automatically calculate the path costs.

Manual

Selects to manually calculate and enter the path costs.

STP Port Path Cost


(Value)

1 to 200000000

This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost to Manual.


Enter the cost manually.

STP Port Priority

0 to 240

Specifies the STP Port Priority.

Edge Port

Enable

Sets the target port to Edge Port.

Disable

Removes the Edge Port setting from the target port.

Force true

Sets Point-to-Point

Force False

Removes the Point-to-Point setting.

Auto

Sets Point-to-Point automatically.

P to P Port

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-77

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-134 Information Dialog Box

The RSTP Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-135 RSTP Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-78

PROVISIONING

5.3.7.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter


Procedure 5-30
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select RSTP Setting. The RSTP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify Detail RSTP Parameter button on the tool bar.
Modify Detail RSTP Parameter button

Figure 5-136 RSTP Setting Window

The Detail RSTP Parameter Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-79

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-137 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting Option Window

Table 5-26 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting


Parameter

Value

Description

Bridge Priority

0 to 61440

Sets STP Priority of the bridge.

STP Bridge MAX Age

6 to 40

Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.


Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]

STP Bridge Hello Time

Sets the period for sending the BPDU Configuration


from Root Bridge. [unit: second]

2
STP Bridge Forward Delay

4 to 30

Sets the delay period to execute the change from the


Listening Port to Learning Port.

STP TX Hold Count

1 to 10

Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per


second.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-138 Information Dialog Box

The RSTP Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-80

PROVISIONING

7. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 5-139 RSTP Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.3.8 ERP Setting


Following shows the procedures for ETH-Ring Protection switch settings:
Procedure 5-31
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ERP Setting. The ERP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify ERP Mode tool button.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-81

Modify ERP Mode button

Figure 5-140 ERP Setting


ERP Mode Setting option window appears.
4. Select Enable by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-141 ERP Mode Setting Option Window


Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-142 Information Dialog Box

The ERP Setting window enables the Add ERP tool button.
6. Click the Add ERP tool button.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-82

PROVISIONING

Add ERP button

Figure 5-143 ERP Setting Window


Step 1 ERP Setting option window appears.
7. Set the appropriate values, then click the Next button:

Figure 5-144 Step 1 ERP Setting Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-83

Table 5-27 Step 1 ERP Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Ring ID

01 to 16

Assign the ID number of the Ring.

Ring Name

(text field)

Enter the Ring name to apply. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters long.

Ring Type

Major Ring

Major Ring is the only choice here.

ERP Version

G.8032v1

Select the ERP Version. G.8032v2 only supports multiple ring ID for the
ports.

G.8032v2
Ring Port0
Item

Specify the type.

Port

Specify the port.

Port Name

(read only)

Indicates the selected ports name.

Ring Port1
Item

Specify the type.

Port

Specify the port.

Port Name
RPL Owner

(read only)

Indicates the selected ports name.

Enable

The RPL Owner node is an ETH Ring node adjacent to the RPL that is
responsible for blocking its end of the RPL under normal conditions.
Only one RPL Owner node should exist in the Ring.

Disable
RPL Port

Port0
Port1

Revertive Mode

Revertive
Non Revertive

Specify the RPL Port. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner
setting is enabled.
Revertive mode switches the Active port back to the original port when
recovered. Non Revertive mode does not. This option is enabled when
the RPL Owner setting is enabled.

WTR

5 [min]

A period to wait before restoring back when the system recovered from
the failure. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner setting is
enabled.

Guard Time

10 to 2000 [ms]

The Guard Timer is active whenever an ETH Ring node receives an


indication that a local switching request has cleared.

NOTE: The Ring Port 0 must be connected to the Ring Port 1 of the opposing
equipment.
Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-84

PROVISIONING

8. Assign the appropriate values, then click the Next button:

Figure 5-145 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Option Window


Table 5-28 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Control VLAN ID

1 to 4094

A VLAN ID is used for R-APS transmission. Control


VLAN ID for each Ring must be unique.

R-APS Message Priority

0 to 7

VLAN CoS field of R-APS frame. [default: 7]

R-APS Message MEG Level

0 to 7

MEG level of R-APS message. [default: 7]

Traffic VLAN ID
Enable

(check box)

Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-85

9. Assign the appropriate values, then click the Next button.

Figure 5-146 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Option Window

Table 5-29 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

LOC Detection

Enable

Enables to detect failures for switching the Ring


using ETH-CC. To carry out the switching under 50
ms, this setting is required with 3.3 ms ETH-CC
setting.

Disable

Disables the LOC Detection.

(radio button)

Check (select) to enable the use of MEP Index.

Ring Port0 / Ring Port1


LOC Detection MEP Index

Step 4 Setting Configuration Screen window appears to show the specified

information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-86

PROVISIONING

10. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-147 Step 4 Setting Configuration Screen

11. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-148 Information Dialog Box

The ERP Setting window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-87

12. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-149 ERP Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-88

PROVISIONING

5.3.9 Link Aggregation


5.3.9.1 Add Link Aggregation
NOTE: For the Radio System, LAG should be assigned by the Radio Traffic
Aggregation that is provided in the Radio Configuration. See the subsection
4.6.2.2 Radio Configuration for details.
Procedure 5-32
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Add LAG tool button.
Add LAG button

Figure 5-150

NOTE: When the Radio Group for the Radio Traffic Aggregation has
been registered, the registered information is listed in this
window as well.
The Add LAG option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-89

4. Assign the LAG:

Figure 5-151 Add LAG Option Window


Table 5-30 Add LAG Option Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter

Value

Description

Link Aggregation Group


LAG

(read only)

Indicates the type of registered LAG; ETH GRP or Radio GRP.

LAG Name

(text field)

Enter the Link Aggregation Group name to apply. Valid value is 1 to 32


characters long.

Mode

LACP-Active

Outputs frames along the configured links regardless of settings on the


other side.

LACP-Passive

Outputs or not to output depending on the settings on the other side;


outputs frames if the other sides control value is Active.

Static

Static operation mode using no LACP.

Short

Sets the an output interval of LACPDUs mode for one second.

Long

Selects an output interval of LACPDUs mode for 30 seconds.

Revertive

Switches the active port back to the original port when recovered.

Non Revertive

Does not switch the active port back even if recovered.

L2 Base

Distribution is based on the Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID,


Ethernet Type and Physical Port ID.

L3 Base

Distribution is based on the Source & Destination IP, Source &


Destination TCP/UDP Port number.

MPLS Base

Distribution is based on the MPLS label.

[This option is for


ETH GRP only.]

TX Interval

Revertive

Distribution
Rule

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-90

PROVISIONING

Table 5-30 Add LAG Option Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Link Aggregation Port


LAG

Not Used

To assign the LAG, select ETH GRP.

ETH GRP
Port Role

Active
Standby

Specify each port to Active/Standby. At least one port must be the


Active.

5. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button. Information dialog box

appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed. The Link Aggregation Setting window updates

the window.

Figure 5-152 Information Dialog Box


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-153 Link Aggregation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-91

5.3.9.2 Modify LAG Registration


Procedure 5-33
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Modify Link Aggregation tool button.
Modify Link Aggregation button

Figure 5-154 Link Aggregation Setting Window


Link Aggregation Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-92

PROVISIONING

4. Modify parameters:
select LAG

i) Select the target LAG (Link Aggregation Group) from the LAG drop-down list.
ii) Modify applicable parameters.
iii) Click the OK button when completed.
Information dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-155 Information Dialog Box

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the window.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-93

6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-156 Link Aggregation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-94

PROVISIONING

5.3.9.3 Delete LAG Registration


Procedure 5-34
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Delete LAG tool button.
Delete LAG button

Figure 5-157

The Delete LAG option window appears.


4. Check (click to leave a tick in the) check box of the LAG to be removed, then
click the OK button.
check box

Figure 5-158 Delete LAG Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-95

Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-159 Information Dialog Box

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-160 Link Aggregation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-96

PROVISIONING

5.3.10 QoS/Classification Setting


Classify Setting tab
iPASOLINK supports QoS based on MEF10 and REC4115, which classifies the
traffic into eight or four classes with the proper Internal Priority according to the
predetermined profile. Except for the default profile, a user can configure up to three
additional profiles, which provides a capability of realizing the flexible and userorientated QoS strategy. The Internal Priority is used for the following purposes:
i) Properly identifies the ingress traffic according to the predetermined Priority.
ii) Maps the eight classes of ingress traffic to four or eight classes at queuing the
egress traffic.
iii) Copies the original internal priority to the capsulated frame to prevent the
traffic priority from changing unexpectedly. (VLAN C-tag CoS/VLAN S-tag
CoS)
Three modes are available for QoS Classification.
1. Equipment Based QoS Mode (default)

QoS classification policies are determined by per-equipment basis. One classification


profile is activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the equipment
configuration. In this mode, most outer QoS field of the packet can be specified for
the classification policy.
2. Port Based QoS Mode

QoS classification policies are determined by per-port basis. In this mode, inner QoS
field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.
3. VLAN ID Based QoS Mode

QoS classification policies are determined by per-VLAN ID basis. In this


VLAN ID field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.

mode,

Ingress
At the ingress traffic, the internal priority is assigned to a frame to perform the flow
control according to the predetermined policer and the Yellow or Green Marker that
is applied to the frame to define whether to discard or forward the frame.
Egress
At the egress traffic, frames are queued according to the internal priority where the
Yellow or Green Marker is applied to determine whether to discard or forward the
frame.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-97

5.3.10.1 Classification Setting (Equipment Based QoS Mode)


(1) Classification Entry Setting
Procedure 5-35
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Select Profile No. button.
Select Profile No. button

Figure 5-161 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The Select Profile No. option window appears.


4. Select a Profile No. to specify, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-162 Select Profile No. Option Window

The QoS/Classification Setting window indicates the selected Profile No. in the
Current Classify Profile Information field.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-98

PROVISIONING

5. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window

appears.
Classification Mode

Figure 5-163 QoS/Classification Setting Window


6. Select Equipment Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the
OK button.

Figure 5-164 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-165 Information Dialog Box

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-99

8. From the Classify Profile No. drop-down list, select the profile number of the

target object:.
Classify Profile No.

Figure 5-166 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The QoS/Classification Setting shows the selected profile.


9. Click the Entry No. of the target to be classified.
Entry No.

Figure 5-167 QoS/Classification Setting Window (showing the target)


Classify Entry Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-100

PROVISIONING

10. Assign the Internal Priority to classify the target port:

Figure 5-168 Classify Entry Setting Option Window


Table 5-31 Classify Entry Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Classify Field type

VLAN CoS

Selects to use VLAN with CoS priority tag.

IPv4 Precedence

Selects to use IPv4 Precedence.

IPv4 DSCP

Selects to use IPv4 DSCP.

IPv6 DSCP

Selects to use IPv6 DSCP.

MPLS EXP

Selects to use MPLS EXP.

Classify Priority

0 to 7

Enter the priority class.

Classify Internal Priority

0 to 7

Select the internal priority class.

11. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
12. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-169 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-101

13. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-170 QoS Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-102

PROVISIONING

(2) Delete Entry


Procedure 5-36
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window

appears.
Classification Mode

Figure 5-171 QoS/Classification Setting Window


4. Select Equipment Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the
OK button.

Figure 5-172 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-103

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-173 Information Dialog Box


6. From the Classify Profile No. drop-down list, select the profile number of the

target object:.
Classify Profile No.

Figure 5-174 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The QoS/Classification Setting shows the selected profile.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-104

PROVISIONING

7. Click the Delete Entry button.


Delete Entry button

Figure 5-175 QoS/Classification Setting Window (showing the target)


Delete Entry option window appears.
8. Select an entry number to be removed, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-176 Delete Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-177 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-105

10. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-178 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the


information.
11. Verify that the selected entry is removed from the list.

Figure 5-179 QoS/Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-106

PROVISIONING

5.3.10.2 Classification Setting (Port Based QoS Mode)


(1) Specify Port Classification Mode
Following steps specify the QoS Classification Mode and Default Priority of
Ingress direction for each port.
Procedure 5-37
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window

appears.
Classification Mode

Figure 5-180 QoS/Classification Setting Window


4. Select Port Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK

button.

Figure 5-181 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-107

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-182 Information Dialog Box


6. Select a target Port No.:
Port No.

Figure 5-183 QoS/Classification Setting Window


Port Classification Mode Setting option window appears.
7. Specify the Port Classification Mode and Default Port Priority for the target port:

Figure 5-184 Port Classification Mode Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-108

PROVISIONING

Table 5-32 Port Classification Mode Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Port Classification Mode

Port

For frames input at the target port, the internal priority of all
frames will be the default port priority value. [default]

CoS(C-Tag)

C-Tag value will be the internal priority value.

CoS(S-Tag)

S-Tag value will be the internal priority value. This option


can be selected when VLAN Mode is 802.1ad.

IPv4/v6 DSCP

The value that is mapped into eight classes according to


IPv4/v6 DSCP value will be the internal priority value. A
mapping table is set per equipment.

0 to 7

Specifies the default internal priority to the target port.

Default Port Priority

8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-185 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the


information.
10. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-186 QoS Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-109

(2) Specify DSCP Classification Mapping


Procedure 5-38
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window

appears.
Classification Mode

Figure 5-187 QoS/Classification Setting Window


4. Select Port Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK

button.

Figure 5-188 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-110

PROVISIONING

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-189 Information Dialog Box


6. Click the DSCP Classification Mapping button:
DSCP Classification Mapping button

Figure 5-190 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The DSCP Classification Mapping option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-111

7. Specify values to parameters:

Figure 5-191 DSCP Classification Mapping Option Window

Table 5-33 DSCP Classification Mapping Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

DSCP Value

0 to 63

DSCP values (0 to 63) in the User Frame Header.

Internal Priority

0 to 7

Assign the Internal Priority (0 to 7) to each DSCP


value.

8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-112

PROVISIONING

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-192 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the


information.

10. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-193 QoS Classification Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-113

5.3.10.3 Ingress Setting


(1) Add Policer Index
Procedure 5-39
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click the Add Policer Index button:

Ingress Setting tab

Add Policer Index button

Figure 5-194 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The Add Policer Index option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-114

PROVISIONING

4. Create the police index:

Figure 5-195 Add Policer Index Option Window


Table 5-34 Add Policer Index Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Policer Index

1 to 256

Specify the Policer index number.

Item

(available card)

Select a name of the target card.

Port

(available port)

Select a port.

Internal Priority

0 to 7

Specify the internal priority.

Policer Profile No.

1 to 16

Specify the Policer Profile number to apply.

VLAN ID

(check box)

Enable VLAN ID option box below.

Enable

(radio button)

Click to enable a policer.

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-115

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-196 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) updates the information.


6. Verify the newly added ingress policer index:

Figure 5-197 QoS/Classification Setting Window Ingress Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-116

PROVISIONING

(2) Set Ingress Policer Profile Details


Procedure 5-40
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click the Ingress Policer Profile
Setting button:

Ingress Setting tab

Ingress Policer Profile Setting button

Figure 5-198 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The Ingress Policer Profile Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-117

4. Click the No. of the target Ingress Policer Profile Index:

Figure 5-199 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window

The Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting option window appears.

Figure 5-200 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting Option Window

Table 5-35 Ingress Policer Detail Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Classify Eir

0 to 1000000

Enter the maximum bandwidth. [unit: kbps]

Classify Cir

0 to 1000000

Enter the minimum guaranteed bandwidth. [unit: kbps}

Classify Ebs

0 to 128

Enter the maximum burst size. [unit: kbyte]

Classify Cbs

0 to 64

Enter the minimum burst size. [unit kbyte]

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-118

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-201 Information Dialog Box

The Ingress Policer Profile Setting option window updates the information.

7. Verify the contents, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-202 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window

Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-119

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-203 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) updates the information.

9. Verify the newly added ingress policer index:

Figure 5-204 QoS/Classification Setting Window Ingress Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-120

PROVISIONING

(3) Modify Policer Index


Procedure 5-41
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click to select a Policer Index

number of the target object:


Ingress Setting tab
Policer Index numbers

Figure 5-205 QoS/Classification Setting Window


Ingress Policer Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-121

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 5-206 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window

Table 5-36 Ingress Policer Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Policer Index

(read only)

Indicates the selected Index number.

Internal Priority

0 to 7

Specifies the internal priority.

Policer Profile No.

1 to 16

Specifies the policer profile number to be applied to the


port.

VLAN ID

(check box)

Enables/Disables the policer of selected VLANs below.

Enable

(radio button)

Enables to set VLAN Service Name.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-122

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-207 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) window updates the


information.
7. Verify that the selected object is modified.

Figure 5-208 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-123

(4) Delete Ingress Policer Index


Procedure 5-42
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click to select a Policer Index

number of the target object:

Ingress Setting tab

Delete Policer Index button

Figure 5-209 QoS/Classification Setting Window


Delete Policer Index option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-124

PROVISIONING

4. Enter the Ingress Policer Index No. to be removed, then click the OK button:

Figure 5-210 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click the OK button.

Figure 5-211 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-212 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) window updates the


information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-125

7. Verify that the selected object is removed.

Figure 5-213 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-126

PROVISIONING

5.3.10.4 Port Setting Tab


Procedure 5-43
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting

window appears.
3. Click to select the Port Setting tab, then click on the Class Mode to open the
Class Mode Setting option window.
Port Setting
Class Mode

Figure 5-214 QoS/Classification Setting Window Port Setting Tag


4. Select a Class Mode by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button:

Figure 5-215 Class Mode Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-127

Table 5-37 Ingress Policer Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Class Mode

4 Class QoS

Sets an output queue to 4 Class. [default]

8 Class QoS

Sets an output queue to 8 Class.

Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-216 Information Dialog Box

The Class Mode Setting option window closes.


6. Click a Port number of the target:

Port numbers

Figure 5-217 QoS/Classification Setting Window


QoS Port Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-128

PROVISIONING

7. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-218 QoS Port Setting Option Window


Table 5-38 QoS Port Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter

Value

Description

4xSP

Queuing modes for 4-Class QoS.

Port Setting
Scheduling Mode

1xSP+3xDWRR

[SP: Strict-Priority; DWRR: Deficit Weighted Round Robin]

4xDWRR
1xSP+7xDWRR Queuing modes for 8-Class QoS.
2xSP+6xDWRR
Drop Mode

Egress Shaper Rate

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

WTD

WTD (Weighted Tail Drop) sets the port to discard packets at the
tail end of the queue if the queue exceeds the specified
threshold.

WRED

WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) sets the port to


randomly discards packets of traffic with the priority lower than
one with higher priority when queue exceeds the specified
threshold.

1 to 1000

Sets the maximum rate at outputs for the egress queue.


[unit: Mbit/s]

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-129

Table 5-38 QoS Port Setting Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Internal Priority Queueing Policy per Ingress Port


Internal Priority 0 Class
to
Internal Priority 7 Class

0 to 7

Specifies the priority of ingress ports.

Egress Class Setting Information


Class 0
to
Class 7

(linked if
available)

Clicking the linked Class n opens Egress Class Setting option


window (Figure 5-219).

Figure 5-219 Egress Class Setting Option Window


See Table 5-39 below.
Shaper Rate

(read only)

Indicates the specified data.

DWRR Weight

(read only)

Indicates the specified data.

Table 5-39 Egress Class Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Class Shaper Rate

0.001 to 1000

Specifies the maximum rate at output for the class.


[unit: Mbit/s]

Class DWRR Weight

1 to 127

Specifies the weight of the queue.

Class Queue Length

16 to 128

Specifies the length for each queue. [unit: kbyte]


Values for Queues 6 and 7 are fixed to 16 kbytes.

WTD Yellow Frame


Threshold

10 to 100

Sets the threshold of Yellow Frame.

WRED Yellow Frame


Threshold

10 to 100

Determines the threshold value for Yellow Frame.

WRED Green Frame


Threshold

10 to 100

Determines the threshold value for Green Frame.

8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-130

PROVISIONING

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-220 Information Dialog Box

The QoS Port Setting option window updates the window.


10. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-221 QoS Port Setting Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-131

11. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-222 Information Dialog Box

The QoS/Classification Setting (Port Setting tab) window updates the


information.
12. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-223 QoS/Classification Setting Window Port Setting Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-132

PROVISIONING

5.3.11 Filter Settings


5.3.11.1 Filter List
(1) Add Filter List
Procedure 5-44
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Filter List tab, then click the Add tool button:
Filter List tab
Add button

Figure 5-224 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab


Add Filter Entry option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-133

4. Specify the filter conditions, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-225 Add Filter Entry Option Window

Table 5-40 Add Filter Entry Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Filter Type

(read only)

Indicates the filter type.

Filtering Mode

(read only)

Indicates the filtering mode.

Source MAC
Address

Any

Selecting Any specifies no particular source MAC address to filter.

(text field)

Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Source MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.

Destination MAC
Address

Any

Selecting Any specifies no particular destination MAC address to filter.

(text field)

Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Destination MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.

CoS

Any

Selecting Any specifies no particular CoS value to filter.

0 to 7

Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the CoS value to filter.

Any

Selecting Any specifies no particular VLAN ID to filter.

1 to 4094

Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the VLAN ID to filter.

Any

Selecting Any specifies no particular Ethernet Type to filter.

0x0000 to
0xFFFF

Unchecking (removing a tick from the) Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Destination MAC Address to filter.

Filtering Rule

VLAN ID

Ethernet Type

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-134

PROVISIONING

Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-226 Information Dialog Box


6. The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-227 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-135

(2) Modify Filter List


Procedure 5-45
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Filter List tab, then click the Entry Index number of the target filter:
Filter List tab
Entry Index

Figure 5-228 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab


Modify Filter Entry option window appears.
4. Modify the filter conditions. See Table 5-40 Add Filter Entry Parameters for

descriptions regarding the parameters.

Figure 5-229 Modify Filter Entry Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-136

PROVISIONING

5. When the modification is completed, click the OK button. Information dialog

box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-230 Information Dialog Box


7. The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-231 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-137

(3) Delete Filter List


Procedure 5-46
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Filter List tab, then click the Delete tool button.

Filter List tab


Delete button

Figure 5-232 Filter Setting Filter List Tab


Delete Filter Entry option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-138

PROVISIONING

4. Check (click to leave a tick in a) check box of the target filter, then click the OK

button.

Figure 5-233 Delete Filter Entry Option Window

Confirmation dialog box appears.

Figure 5-234 Confirmation Dialog Box


5. Click the OK button to proceed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-235 Information Dialog Box

The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-139

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-236 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-140

PROVISIONING

5.3.11.2 Profile List


(1) Add Profile List
Procedure 5-47
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Profile List tab, then click the Add tool button:
Profile List tab
Add button

Figure 5-237 Filter Setting Window Filter List Tab


Add Filter Profile option window appears.
4. Check (leave a tick in a) Select check box(es) of the porfile(s) to add, then click
the OK button.

Figure 5-238 Add Filter Entry Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-141

Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-239 Information Dialog Box

The Filter Setting window (Profile List tab) updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-240 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-142

PROVISIONING

(2) Delete Profile List


Procedure 5-48
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Profile List tab, then click the Delete tool button.

Profile List tab


Delete button

Figure 5-241 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab


Delete Filter Entry option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-143

4. Check (click to leave a tick in a) check box of the target filter, then click the OK

button.

Figure 5-242 Delete Filter Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

Figure 5-243 Confirmation Dialog Box


5. Click the OK button to proceed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-244 Information Dialog Box

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-144

PROVISIONING

The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-245 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-145

5.3.11.3 Port Filter Settings


Procedure 5-49
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. In the Port Filter Setting List tab, then click the Port number of the target port.
Profile List tab
Port Number

Figure 5-246 Filter Setting Window Port Filter Setting List Tab
Ingress Filter Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Profile Index to apply, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-247 Delete Filter Entry Option Window

NOTE: In the Profile Index drop-down list, the listed items excluding
Not Used have been created at the procedure earlier in the
Filter Settings.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-146

PROVISIONING

Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-248 Information Dialog Box

The Filter Setting window (Port Filter Setting List tab) updates the information.
6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-249 Filter Setting Window Profile List Tab

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-147

5.3.12 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting


Procedure 5-50
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting. The L2CP Transparent/
Mirroring Setting window appears.
3. Click the Port number of the target.
Port Number

Figure 5-250 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Window


4. L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting option window appears. Specify values to

be set:

Figure 5-251 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-148

PROVISIONING

Table 5-41 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Media Type

(read only)

Indicates the Media type.

Speed

(read only)

Indicates the speed.

Monitoring

Disable

Disables the monitoring function.

Monitoring

Sets the port as the monitored port.

Mirror

Sets the port as Mirror Port. The traffic of the


monitored port will be duplicated to this port.

Ingress

Specifies to monitor the ingress traffic of the port.

Egress

Specifies to monitor the egress traffic of the port.

Both

Specifies to monitor both the ingress and egress


traffics of the port.

(check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to enables


the PDU of the protocol transparent without
processing.

Port Information

Monitoring Direction

L2 Protocol Transparency
Tunnel Enable

NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel is not supported on the RSTP enabled port.


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-252 Information Dialog Box

The L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-149

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-253 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.3.13 Port Isolate Setting


Procedure 5-51
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Port Isolate Setting. The Port Isolate Setting window

appears.
3. Click the Port number of the target.
Port Number

Figure 5-254 Port Isolate Setting Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-150

PROVISIONING

4. Port Isolate Setting option window appears. Specify values to be set:

Figure 5-255 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Option Window


Table 5-42 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Port Isolate

Enable

Enables the Port Isolate function.

Disable

Disables the Port Isolate function.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-256 Information Dialog Box

The L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-257 Port Isolate Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-151

5.3.14 LLF Setting


5.3.14.1 Add LLF Group
Procedure 5-52
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add LLF button:
Add LLF button

Figure 5-258 LLF Setting Window


LLF Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-259 LLF Setting (Add) Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-152

PROVISIONING

Table 5-43 LLF Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

LLF GRP ID

1 to 16

Specifies the LLF Group ID Number.

Item

(available card)

Selects the target card.

Send LLF Signal

Enable

Enables sending the LLF Signals.

Disable

Disables sending the LLF Signals.

Enable

Ignores a received LLF Signal.

Disable

Accepts received LLF Signal.

(check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set the


port as Edge Port.

Trunk Port Setting

Ignore Received LLF Signal

Edge Port Setting

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-260 Information Dialog Box

The LLF Setting window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-261 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-153

5.3.14.2 Modify LLF Group


Procedure 5-53
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click an LLF GRP ID number of the target LLF:
LLF GRP numbers

Figure 5-262 LLF Setting Window


LLF Setting (Modify) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-263 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-154

PROVISIONING

Table 5-44 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

LLF GRP ID

(read only)

Indicates the selected LLF GRP ID number.

Item

(available card)

Selects to change the target card.

Send LLF Signal

Enable

Enables sending the LLF Signals.

Disable

Disables sending the LLF Signals.

Enable

Ignores a received LLF Signal.

Disable

Accepts received LLF Signal.

(check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set the


port as Edge Port.

Trunk Port Setting

Ignore Received LLF Signal

Edge Port Setting

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-264 Information Dialog Box

The LLF Setting window updates the information.


6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-265 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-155

5.3.14.3 Delete LLF Group


Procedure 5-54
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click the Delete LLF GRP button:

Delete LLF button

Figure 5-266 LLF Setting Window


LLF Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Select the LLF GRP ID number of the target to be removed, then click the OK

button:

Figure 5-267 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-156

PROVISIONING

5. Click the OK button.

Figure 5-268 Confirmation Dialog box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-269 Information Dialog Box

The LLF Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-270 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-157

5.3.15 Broadcast Storm Control Setting


Following procedure sets the input rate for the broadcast storm control, and enables/
disable the Broadcast Storm Control per Ethernet port (including MODEM port).
Procedure 5-55
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast Storm
Control Setting window appears.
3. Click the Broadcast Storm Control Rate.
Broadcast Storm Control Rate

Figure 5-271 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window

The Broadcast Storm Control Rate option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-158

PROVISIONING

4. Specify the input rate of the target frames for Broadcast Storm Control, then click
the OK button:

Figure 5-272 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Option Window


Table 5-45 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Broadcast Storm Control Rate

1 to 1000 Mbps

Sets the input rate of the frame for the Broadcast


Storm Control. [granularity: 1 Mbps]

Information dialog box appears.


5. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-273 Information Dialog Box

The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information.


6. Click the target port to set the Broadcast Storm Control usage:
Port Number

Figure 5-274 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window


Broadcast Storm Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-159

7. Set Enable or Disable the Broadcast Storm Control by clicking its radio button,
then click the OK button:

Figure 5-275 Broadcast Storm Control Option Window


Information dialog box appears.
8. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-276 Information Dialog Box

The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information.


9. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-277 LLF Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-160

PROVISIONING

5.4 Configure Crossconnection


iPASOLINK supports the crossconnection configured using E1 Ports and STM-1
Ports. The E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting menu provides the following options:
E1 Port Setting
Sets E1 Port by specifying E1 Port Name, E1 CH Usage, Channel Impedance and
unused CH reports.
STM-1 Port Setting
Sets STM-1 Port by specifying STM-1 Port Mode, Usage, TIM ALM and ALS
(Automatic Laser Shutdown).
Cross Connect Setting
Configures the Cross Connect, and confirms the current usage of Cross Connect and
Ports (CH).

5.4.1 E1 Port Setting


Procedure 5-56
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select E1 Port Setting. The E1 Port Setting window

appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Modify button

Figure 5-278 E1 Port Setting Window


E1 Port Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-161

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-279 E1 Port Setting (Modify) Option Window


Table 5-46 E1 Port Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Collective Setting: This option sets all ports to the same values. To set ports individually, use the options below
the Collective Setting options.
CH Usage
CH Usage Error Report

Impedance

CH Usage
CH Usage Error Report
Impedance

Port Name

NWD-118790-04E

Used All

All E1 Channels are set to be used.

Not Used All

All E1 Channels are set to be unused.

Report All

Allows to report a usage error if an unused E1 CH is detected


at the input signal.

Not Report All

Disables to report a usage error for all E1 ports.

All CH 120

Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 120 ohms.

All CH 75

Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 75 ohms.

Used

Sets to use the port.

Not Used

Sets not to use the port.

Report

Enables to report the usage error if detecting an unused port.

Not Report

Disables to report a usage error.

120

Sets the port impedance to 120 ohms.

75

Sets the port impedance to 75 ohms.

(text field)

Specifies a name to the port. Valid value is at least one, up to


32 characters long.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-162

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-280 Information Dialog Box

The E1 Port Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-281 E1 Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-163

5.4.2 STM-1 Port Setting


Procedure 5-57
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select STM-1 Port Setting. The STM-1 Port Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Modify button

Figure 5-282 STM-1 Port Setting Window


STM-1 Port Setting option window appears. Provided options differ depending
on the STM-1 Mode. STM-1 Modes are Through and Channelized:

Through: The Through Mode transmits the STM-1 over the radio frame.
Channelized: The Channelized Mode extracts the 63 E1 channels from the
STM-1 to use them selectively.
4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-164

PROVISIONING

STM-1 Mode: Through

Figure 5-283 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Option Window


Table 5-47 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

STM-1 Mode

Through

Indicates Through for STM-1 Mode.

Port Setting
Port Usage

Used

Sets to use the STM-1 Port.

Not Used

Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.

Port Name

(text filed)

Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32 characters


long.

MS-AIS Generation

Enable

Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting that STM1 signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and to output MS-AIS.

Disable

Disables this function.

Enable

Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.

Disable

Disables the ALS function.

60sec

Sets the delay time to release the ALS when the alarm is
cleared.

ALS Usage
ALS Interval

180sec
300sec
STM-1 Switch Setting
Lock-in Usage

Detection Time [min]

Used

Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying out a


switching operation to prevent frequently executing the
switching.

Not Used

Disables this function.

1 to 60

Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a failure and


execution of the switch operation. [unit: minute]

Detection Count [times]

1 to 255

Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over times.

Clear Lock-in Time [min]

1 to 2880

Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in mode.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-165

STM-1 Mode: Channelized

Figure 5-284 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode)

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-166

PROVISIONING

Table 5-48 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters (1 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

STM-1 Mode

Channelized

Indicates Channelized for STM-1 Mode.

Used

Sets to use the STM-1 Port.

Not Used

Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.

Port Name

(text filed)

Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32


characters long.

MS-AIS Generation

Enable

Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting


that STM-1 signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and
to output MS-AIS.

Disable

Disables this function.

Enable

Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.

Disable

Disables the ALS function.

60sec

Sets the delay time to release the ALS when the alarm
is cleared.

Port Setting
Port Usage

ALS Usage

ALS Interval

180sec
300sec
Trace Setting
Trace Mode

J0: Section Trace

Enables to detect RS-TIM.

J1: High Order


Path Trace

Enables to detect HP-TIM.

Trace Mismatch AIS


Generation Action

Enable

Enables the function to output AIS if detecting TIM.

Disable

Disables this function.

Section Trace Send

1 to 15

Sets J0 in the outgoing direction. Enabled when Trace


Mode is J0: Section Trace.

Expected Section Trace

1 to 15

Sets J0 in the incoming direction. Enabled when Trace


Mode is J0: Section Trace.

Higher Order Path Trace

1 to 15

Sets J1 in the outgoing direction. Enabled when Trace


Mode is J1: HIgher Order Path Trace.

Expected Higher Order


Path Trace

1 to 15

Sets J1 in the incoming direction. Enabled when Trace


Mode is J1: HIgher Order Path Trace.

Received Section Trace

(read only)

Indicates the received Section Trace value.

Received High Order


Path Trace

(read only)

Indicates the received Higher-Order Path Trace value.

Received Trace Value

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-167

Table 5-48 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Enable

Enables to transfer an alarm through E1 Channel with


STM-1 is configured as Channelized.

Disable

Disables the function.

Used

Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying


out a switching operation to prevent frequently
executing the switching.

Not Used

Disables this function.

Detection Time [min]

1 to 60

Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a


failure and execution of the switch operation. [unit:
minute]

Detection Count [times]

1 to 255

Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over


times.

Clear Lock-in Time [min]

1 to 2880

Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in


mode.

Radio Alarm Transfer Setting


Radio Alarm Transfer

STM-1 Switch Setting


Lock-in Usage

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-285 Information Dialog Box

The STM-1 Port Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-168

PROVISIONING

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-286 STM-1 Port Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-169

5.4.3 Cross Connect Setting


iPASOLINK 1000 supports the Cross Connection of 2M E1 and STM-1 (Through
Mode) levels. Up to 168 Cross Connections in total can be created.
Following lists the interface cards that support the Cross Connections:

Table 5-49 Cross Connect Settings


Card Type

Number of
Cards per IDU

Number of
Ports per Card

Description

MODEM-A

Up to 12

152

16E1-A

Up to 14

16

STM1-A (Channelized Mode)

Up to 14

63

STM1-A (Through Mode)

Up to 14

As one 75xE1 Port.

See the following table for channel numbering of the Channelized STM-1:

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-170

PROVISIONING

Table 5-50 Channel Numbering of Channelized STM-1


STM-1
TUG-3# TUG-2# TU-12#
NEO
Channelized
Extension
#K
#L
#M
Port No.
Port No.

STM-1
TUG-3# TUG-2# TU-12#
NEO
Channelized
Extension
#K
#L
#M
Port No.
Port No.

34

14

22

35

35

43

36

56

37

17

25

38

38

46

39

59

40

20

28

41

41

49

42

62

10

10

43

11

31

44

24

12

52

45

45

13

13

46

14

34

47

27

15

55

48

48

16

16

49

17

37

50

30

18

58

51

51

19

19

52

12

20

40

53

33

21

61

54

54

22

55

15

23

23

56

36

24

44

57

57

25

58

18

26

26

59

39

27

47

60

60

28

61

21

29

29

62

42

30

50

63

63

31

11

32

32

33

53

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-171

5.4.3.1 Add Cross Connect Assignment


(1) Non-Protection Mode
Procedure 5-58
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add tool button to create a new Cross Connection:

Add button

Figure 5-287 Cross Connect Setting Window

Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-172

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-288 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window


Table 5-51 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Service No.

1 to 168

Enter Service Number of the Cross Connection.

Service Name

(text field)

Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This


field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.

Cross Connect Type

E1

Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.

STM-1 (Through)

Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.

Protection

(check box)

Do not check (not to leave a tick in) the check box for
Non-Protection setting.

(available port)

Select a port for Edge A. NOTE

Protection

(check box)

Do not check (not to leave a tick in) the check box for
Non-Protection setting.

(available port)

Select a port for Edge B. NOTE

AMR Linkage

(hyperlink)

Verify the channel number and modularization related


to the current assignment.

Edge A

Edge B

NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel
spacing.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-173

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-289 Information Dialog Box

The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-290 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-174

PROVISIONING

(2) Protection Mode


Procedure 5-59
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add tool button to create a new Cross Connection:
Add button

Figure 5-291 Cross Connect Setting Window

Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-175

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-292 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window


Table 5-52 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Service No.

1 to 168

Enter Service Number of the Cross Connection.

Service Name

(text field)

Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This


field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.

Cross Connect Type

E1

Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.

STM-1 (Through)

Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.

Protection

(check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to configure the


Protection. Checking this box enables the option box below.

(available port)

Select a port for Edge A, Term1/Term2. NOTE

Protection

(check box)

Check (leave a tick in) the check box to configure the


Protection. Checking this box enables the option box below.

(available port)

Select a port for Edge B, Term1/Term2. NOTE

AMR Linkage

(hyperlink)

Verify the channel number and modularization related to


the current assignment.

Edge A

Edge B

NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel
spacing.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-176

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-293 Information Dialog Box

The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-294 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.4.3.2 Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment


Procedure 5-60
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-177

3. Click the Service No. of the target Cross Connect.


Service Numbers

Figure 5-295 Cross Connect Setting Window


Cross Connect Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 5-296 Cross Connect Setting (Modify) Option Window

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-178

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-297 Information Dialog Box

The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-298 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.4.3.3 Delete Cross Connect Assignment


Procedure 5-61
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/
Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect
Setting window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-179

3. Click the Delete button:


Delete button

Figure 5-299 Cross Connect Setting Window


Cross Connect Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target crossconnection:

Figure 5-300 Cross Connect Setting (Delete) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-180

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-301 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
7. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-302 Information Dialog Box

The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.


8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-303 Cross Connect Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-181

5.5 Set PWE Function


Following specifies the TDM PWE (SAToP) function:

5.5.1 Add New PWE


Procedure 5-62
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting. The
PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add PWE tool button:
Add PWE button

Figure 5-304 PWE Setting Window


Step 1 PWE Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-182

PROVISIONING

4. Modify parameters:

Detail Option button

Figure 5-305 Step 1 PWE Setting Option Window


Table 5-53 Step 1 PWE Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

PWE No.

1 to 256

Assign the service number of PWE.

PWE Service Name

(text field)

Enter the service name of PWE. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters


long.

MSE E1 CH

CH01 to CH64

Select E1 Cross Connect CH.

Jitter Buffer

2 [ms]

Set the Jitter Buffer size.

4 [ms]

e.g., Select 8 [ms] for 4 ms Jitter Buffer.

8 [ms]
16 [ms]
32 [ms]
64 [ms]
128 [ms]
Clock Mode

Assign CH

ACR

MSE E1 CH No. 1 to 16.

Select TDM synchronization source


clock to transmit.

NE Clock

MSE E1 CH No. 1 to 64

Sync E1

MSE E1 CH No. 1 to 64

1 to 16

Enabled when the ACR Slave is selected.

5. When completed, click the Detail Option button. (To change Capsule E1 frame

size / RTP Header addition.)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-183

Detail Option window appears.


6. Specify/Modify the parameters:

Figure 5-306 Detail Option Window


Table 5-54 PWE Detail Option Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Capsule E1 Frame Size

1 to 8

RTP Header

On

Enables the Option RTP Header addition.

Off

Disables the Option RTP Header addition.

7. Click the OK button. The Detail Option window disappears.


8. Click the Next button on the Step 1 PWE Setting option window. Step 2 Select
VLAN ID option window appears.
9. Specify/Modify parameters:

Figure 5-307 Step 2 Select VLAN ID Option Window

NOTE: To add VLAN ID, click the Add VLAN ID tool button, then go to
5.3.4 VLAN Setting.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-184

PROVISIONING

Table 5-55 PWE Detail Option Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

COS

0 to 7

COS valued of PWE.

ECID

1 to 1048575

Specify the ID of PWE.

Destination MAC Address

(text field)
ff.ff.ff.ff.ff.ff

Enter the MAC Address of opposing MSE-A (display to


PWE Setting window) or Broadcast Address.

10. Click the Next button. Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen option window

appears.
11. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-308 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Option Window


12. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

Figure 5-309 Information Dialog Box

The PWE Setting window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-185

13. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-310 PWE Setting (1) Window

Figure 5-311 PWE Setting (2) Window

14. Add Cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH (refer to 5.4.3 Cross
Connect Setting).

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-186

PROVISIONING

5.5.2 Modify PWE


Procedure 5-63
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting. The
PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the PWE No. link of the target object:
PWE No.

Figure 5-312 PWE Setting Window


Step 1 PWE Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-187

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 5-313 Step 1 PWE Setting Option Window


5. When completed, click the Next button. Step 2 Select VLAN ID option window

appears.
6. Modify the parameters:

Figure 5-314 Step 2 Select VLAN ID Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-188

PROVISIONING

7. When completed, click the Next button. Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen

option window appears.


8. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-315 Step 3 Setting Confirmation Screen Option Window

9. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-316 Information Dialog Box

The PWE Setting window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-189

10. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-317 PSW Setting (1) Window

Figure 5-318 PSW Setting (2) Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-190

PROVISIONING

5.5.3 Delete PWE


Procedure 5-64
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning to select PWE Setting. The
PWE Setting window appears.
3. Click the Delete PWE tool button.
Delete PWE button

Delete PWE option window appears.


4. Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target PWE.

check
box

Figure 5-319 Delete PWE Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-191

5. Click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-320 Confirmation Dialog Box

While in progress, the progress bar appears.

Figure 5-321 Progress Bar


7. When completed, Information dialog box appears.

Figure 5-322 Information Dialog Box


8. The PWE Setting window updates the information.

Figure 5-323 PSW Setting Window


9. Delete Cross connect between E1 CH and MSE-A E1 CH. Refer to 5.4.3 Cross
Connect Setting. This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-192

PROVISIONING

5.6 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization


The procedures here sets the Internal/External Clock and the Timing Source
Selection of the equipment. The EXT Clock Setting menu provides the following
menu:
Equipment Clock Setting
Selects the Clock and Timing Source.
EXT Clock Setting
Sets the CLK Output parameters.

5.6.1 Set Equipment Clock


Procedure 5-65
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Equipment
Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Equipment Clock Setting. The
Equipment Clock Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-324 Equipment Clock Setting Window


Equipment Clock Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-193

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-325 Equipment Clock Setting Option Window

Table 5-56 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (1 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Equipment CLK Mode

Master

Sets the equipment clock as the Master Clock


to provide timing signals to synchronize Slave
Clocks.

Slave

Sets the equipment clock as a Slave Clock to


be synchronized with the Master Clock.

Enable

Enables the Synchronous Ethernet function.

Disable

Disables the Synchronous Ethernet function.

QL Mode

Sets to select the clock source by its quality


level.

PL Mode

Sets to select the clock source by its priority


level.

No Entry

Select a clock source.

SyncETH

Clock Source Selective


Mode

Timing Source

1,
2

Line CLK1/2
GbE Line CLK
E1 Line CLK
Option Line CLK (STM1)

No Entry
EXT CLK

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-194

PROVISIONING

Table 5-56 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

Slot

(available slot #)

Select a Slot number of the target object.

Port/CH

(available port #)

Select a Port number of the target that can


extract the clock information.

Priority

1 to 12

Sets the priority of the timing source


manually.

Line SSM Usage

Use

Sets to use the Line SSM.

Not Used

Sets not to use the Line SSM.

QL-PRC
QL-SSU-A
QL-SSU-B
QL-SEC

Selects the Primary Reference Clock.


Required when the Line SSM Usage is set to
Not Used:

Forced SSM Value

Quality

Overwrite
SSM Code

HIGH

0010

QL-SSU-A

0100

QL-SSU-B

1000

LOW

1011

Quality Level
QL-PRC

QL-SEC

WTR

Sets the Wait to Restore time that is a period


to wait for enabling the timing source when
recovered.

10 sec
20 sec
30 sec
1 min to 15 min (by the minute)

5. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 5-326 Warning Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-195

7. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-327 Information Dialog Box

The Equipment Clock Setting window updates the information.

8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-328 Equipment Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-196

PROVISIONING

5.6.2 Set EXT Clock


Procedure 5-66
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Equipment
Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Ext Clock Setting. The Ext Clock
Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify tool button:
Modify button

see NOTE

Figure 5-329 Ext Clock Setting Window

NOTE: Status Information Out EXT CLK2 option box does not appear if no
registration is made to MAIN SLOT2 (Not Used).

Ext Clock Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-197

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

see NOTE

Figure 5-330 Ext Clock Setting Option Window

NOTE: Out EXT CLK2 option box does not appear if no registration is made to
MAIN SLOT2 (Not Used).

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-198

PROVISIONING

Table 5-57 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

120

Selects the impedance of EXT CLK.

In/Out
EXT Impedance

75
EXT CLK Interface

bps

Selects EXT CLK by bit/s or Hertz

Hz
CRC On/Off

SSM Support

Sa Bit

On

Enables the Ext Clock CRC check.

Off

Disables the Ext Clock CRC check.

Enable

Supports SSM.

Disable

Disables SSM usage.

Sa4 to Sa8

Sets SSM bit of input/output Ext Clock.

NOT SELECT

Select a CLK type. Selecting NOT SELECT


disables CLK outputs.

Out
EXT CLK Out SEL

NE CLK
MODEM1
MODEM2
GbE Line CLK
E1 Line CLK
Option Line CLK
Slot

(available Slot #)

Select a Slot number of the target object.

Port/CH

(available Port/CH #)

Select a Port or CH number.

Message Pass Through

On

Enables SSM Message Pass Through mode.


[This option is fixed to On.]

Forced SSM Send Value


Threshold AIS
Generation Mode

Off

QL Threshold
AIS Generation Mode

This option is not supported.

AIS
Shutdown

Timing Loop Prevention

This option is not supported.

This option is not supported.


Selects to generate AIS or to shut down the
clock configuration if the output clock source
fails.

On

Enables the timing loop detection.

Off

Disables the timing loop detection.

NOTE: Port/CH numbers cannot be changed when the same interface is already
used by the equipment clock setting.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-199

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-331 Information Dialog Box

The Ext Clock Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

see NOTE

Figure 5-332 Equipment Clock Setting Window

NOTE: Out EXT CLK2 option box does not appear if no registration is made to
MAIN SLOT2 (Not Used).
This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-200

PROVISIONING

5.7 Assign STM-1 (Through) Port for V.11/OW


Use the following procedures to assign the user interface (V.11, RS-232C) and
Orderwire Channel:
V.11/SC Control Setting
Select the input of SC Channel, RS-232C, and V.11 from the SC channel of each
MODEM.
V.11 Directional Setting
Set the working mode of V.11.
OW Setting
Set the Orderwire Channel of the radio section and CALL OUT polarity.

5.7.1 V.11/SC Setting


5.7.1.1 Assign SC Channel Usage
Procedure 5-67
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.
3. Click the SC Channel link:

SC Channel

Figure 5-333 V.11/SC Setting Window


V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-201

4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and set an SC Channel to the appropriate

port:
Item: MODEM

Item: STM1-A

Figure 5-334 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-335 Information Dialog Box

The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-336 Equipment Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-202

PROVISIONING

5.7.1.2 Set for MODEM


Procedure 5-68
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.
3. Click the MODEM link:

MODEM

Figure 5-337 V.11/SC Setting Window


V.11/SC Setting (MODEM) option window appears.
4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and assign the appropriate usage:
From MODEM

From MODEM to STM1-A

Figure 5-338 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-203

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-339 Information Dialog Box

The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-340 Equipment Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-204

PROVISIONING

5.7.1.3 Set for STM1-A


Procedure 5-69
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.
3. Click the STM1-A link:

STM1-A

Figure 5-341 V.11/SC Setting Window


V.11/SC Setting (STM1-A) option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-205

4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and assign the appropriate usage:

Figure 5-342 V.11/SC Setting (STM1-A) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-343 Information Dialog Box

The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-206

PROVISIONING

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-344 V.11/SC Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-207

5.7.2 Assign V.11 Directional Setting


Procedure 5-70
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11 Directional Setting. The V.11 Directional Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Modify button

Figure 5-345 V.11 Directional Setting Window


V.11 Directional Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate direction:

Figure 5-346 V.11 Directional Setting Option Window


Table 5-58 V.11 Directional Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

V.11-1 Direction Setting


V.11-2 Direction Setting

Co-Directional

The direction to receive data is the same as


that of the Clock Input/Output.

Contra-Directional

The direction to receive data is the opposite to


that of the Clock Input/Output.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-208

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-347 Information Dialog Box

The V.11 Directional Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-348 V.11 Directional Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-209

5.7.3 Assign Orderwire Setting


5.7.3.1 SW GRP1 (MODEM)
Procedure 5-71
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify link:
MODEM

Figure 5-349 OW Setting Window


OW Setting (MODEM) option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate usage:

Figure 5-350 OW Setting Option Window


Table 5-59 OW Setting (MODEM) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

OW Use DSC

Used

Enables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card.

Not Used

Disables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-210

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-351 Information Dialog Box

The OW Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-352 OW Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-211

5.7.3.2 AUX-A
Procedure 5-72
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.
3. Click the AUX-A link:
AUX-A

Figure 5-353 OW Setting Window


OW Setting (AUX-A) option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 5-354 OW Setting Option Window


Table 5-60 OW Setting (AUX-A) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Call Polarity

Invert

Calls if a signal is not normal.

Normal

Calls when a signal is normal.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-212

PROVISIONING

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-355 Information Dialog Box

The OW Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-356 OW Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-213

5.8 Specify Relay Alarm Mappings


By mounting optional card of AUX, iPASOLINK is available to use Alarm input/
output function port for sub-signal of Cluster Alarm and House Keeping.
When Housekeeping input at own station is detected, Cluster Alarm will transmit to
the opposite station by setting up the bit of Cluster ALM input (output toward to
wireless).
When any changes for Cluster ALM output (input toward to wireless) is detected
after Cluster Alarm signal was received by equipment in the opposite station, the
equipment in the opposite station will be set-up bit for House Keeping output control
then Relay output (RL) will be executing.
After receiving a Cluster Alarm signal from the opposite station and another Cluster
Alarm is input (output to the direction of the radio), a setup is performed, Cluster
Alarm signal is sent out to an opposite office. It is possible to transmit the Cluster
Alarm signal.
HK IN 1 to 6 (External input functions, cluster alarm, housekeeping
input ports)
(a) House Keeping Input Port
House Keeping external input port provides six port, four of six ports are used by
both Cluster Alarm and House Keeping and each port is required to select Alarm
function. When an external input port is selected by HKIN, the change of HKIN
is detected then the change is reported to upper level.
(b) Cluster Alarm Input Port
When 1 to 4 external input ports are selected as a Cluster Alarm input, F/W
executes to change the signal of HKIN1-4 into Cluster Alarm signal in wireless
frame then output the signal toward to opposite side of wireless. In addition, any
Modems are available to output the Cluster Alarm input signal.

RL OUT 1 to 6 (External output functions, cluster alarm, house keeping


output ports)
(a) House Keeping Output Port
House Keeping output port provides six port, four of six port are used by both
Cluster Alarm and House Keeping and each port (HK1-4) required to set up
individually from F/W to FPGA.
Set up to OK or not OK for each item (parallel alarm required to set up for each

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-214

PROVISIONING

alarm items), execute port output if over one alarm at specified item is detected.
H/W control output port for other 2 port. (RL1, RL2 port will be fixed for parallel
alarm output by H/W.)
(b) Cluster Alarm Output Port
When House Keeping output ports 1 to 4 are selected as a Cluster Alarm output,
any Cluster Alarm detected from the radio side is outputted to any output port.
Cluster Alarm output 1 to 4 signals are selected after the incoming signals of a
MODEM under redundant system, and the arbitrary Cluster Alarm is output to
the radio port of CH unit.
In Cluster Alarm, it outputs and inputs to two or more MODEM(s) or it has a
through control facility, the signal from MODEM (SW GRP unit) is chosen per
Cluster port, it is possible to MODEM (SW GRP unit) to carry out an output
setup.
Cluster Alarm input and output, and a Through function can be separately
controlled between different ports.
Table 5-61 Port Assignment for Cluster Alarm Setting
Conditions

Enabled to set when AUX-A is registered

RL01

RL02

RL03

RL04

RL05

RL06

Out

MASK

MASK

MASK

MASK

Main Card CPU Alarm

Out

Power Supply

Out

HK Out 1

HK Out 2

HK Out 3

HK Out 4

Cluster ALM 1 Out

Cluster ALM 2 Out

Cluster ALM 3 Out

Cluster ALM 4 Out

Maintenance

Remaining Alarms

: Initial Setting;

: Changeable; : Unable to Set;

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Enabled to set when AUX-A is registered.

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-215

5.8.1 Relay Control Setting


Procedure 5-73
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Relay-Alarm
Mapping Setting to select Relay Control Setting. The Relay Control Setting

window appears.
3. Click a tab of the target Card, then click the Modify tool button:

Tabs to select Cards appear for the installed Cards only.


Modify button

Figure 5-357 Relay Control Setting Window (Example: MC-M)

The Relay Control Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-216

PROVISIONING

4. Click in the field to select an option.

Selecting Out issues the signal when the event occurs.


A field of the selected item changes to green.
RL03 to RL06 are displayed when the AUX-A Card is registered.

Figure 5-358 Relay Control Setting Option Window (Example: MC-M) (1/2)

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-217

OK button

Figure 5-359 Relay Control Setting Option Window (Example: MC-M) (2/2)
5. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-360 Information Dialog Box

The Relay Contact Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the specified information. Repeat steps to set alarms of other Cards.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-218

PROVISIONING

5.8.2 Cluster Alarm Setting


Procedure 5-74
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Provisioning then expand the RelayAlarm Mapping Setting to select Cluster Alarm Setting. The Cluster Alarm
Setting window appears.
2. Click the Modify tool button.

Figure 5-361 Cluster Alarm Setting Window


Cluster Alarm Setting option window appears.
3. Specify the appropriate parameters, the click the OK button

Figure 5-362 Cluster Alarm Setting Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-219

4. Click the OK button.

Figure 5-363 Information Dialog Box


5. The Cluster Alarm Setting window updates the information. Confirm the

displayed parameters.

Figure 5-364 Cluster Alarm Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-220

PROVISIONING

5.9 Configure Alarm/AIS Setting


Use the following procedures to configure the alarm severity, colors, and the relevant
settings of AIS events.
Correlation Setting
Users can modify the conditions to mask alarms (if displaying/clearing alarms on
LCT or LED).
Alarm Severity Setting
Users can modify the severity level of each alarm, such as critical, major, minor, and
warning, reported by iPASOLINK 1000.
AIS Setting
Users can enable/disable AIS outputs, and specify the conditions if to output AIS and
delay time to output AIS.
BER Threshold Setting
Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/
SD.

5.9.1 Correlation Settings


Procedure 5-75
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Correlation Setting. The Correlation Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Modify button

Figure 5-365 Correlation Setting Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-221

Correlation Setting option window appears.


4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 5-366 Correlation Setting Option Window


Table 5-62 Correlation Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Alarm Correlation

On

Enables to detect lower level alarms.

Off

Disables to detect lower level alarms.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-367 Information Dialog Box

The Correlation Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-368 Correlation Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-222

PROVISIONING

5.9.2 Alarm Severity Setting


Using the following procedure, alarm severity levels can be assigned to conditions
that iPASOLINK has.
Procedure 5-76
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Alarm Severity Setting. The Alarm Severity Setting window

appears.
3. Click the target object tab to select, and click the Modify tool button:
Modify button
click a tab

Figure 5-369
Alarm Severity Setting option window appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-223

4. Assign the severity level by selecting the level from the Alarm Status drop-down
list, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-370 Alarm Severity Setting Option Window


5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-371 Information Dialog Box

The Alarm Severity Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-224

PROVISIONING

6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-372 Alarm Severity Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-225

5.9.3 AIS Setting


Procedure 5-77
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select AIS Setting. The AIS Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Modify button

Figure 5-373 AIS Setting Window


AIS Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 5-374 AIS Setting Option Window


Table 5-63 AIS Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter

Value

Description

AIS Activation Condition

LOF + High BER

Sends AIS by receiving LOF and High BER alarms.

LOF

Sends AIS by receiving LOF signal only.

Report

Reports the event of generated AIS.

Not Report

Not to report the event of generated AIS.

AIS Generated Report

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-226

PROVISIONING

Table 5-63 AIS Setting Parameters (2 of 2)


Parameter

Value

Description

AIS Received Report

Report

Report the event of receiving AIS.

Not Report

Not to report the event of receiving AIS.

Alarm

Treats an event of receiving AIS as an alarm.

Status

Treat an event of receiving AIS as no alarm (event).

AIS Received Condition

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-375 Information Dialog Box

The AIS Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-376 AIS Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-227

5.9.4 BER Threshold Setting


Use the following procedures to specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/
STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/SD.

5.9.4.1 Switch Group 1 (MODEM)


Procedure 5-78
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window

appears.
3. Click the desired MODEM link:
links to objects option windows

Figure 5-377 BER Threshold Setting Window


BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-378 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-228

PROVISIONING

Table 5-64 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

High BER

1E-3

Specifies the High BER Threshold of MW.

1E-4
1E-5
Low BER

1E-6

Specifies the Low BER Threshold of MW.

1E-7
1E-8
1E-9

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-379 Information Dialog Box

The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-380 BER Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-229

5.9.4.2 STM1-A
Procedure 5-79
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window

appears.
3. Click the desired STM1-A link:
links to objects option windows

Figure 5-381 BER Threshold Setting Window


BER Threshold Setting (STM1 A) option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-382 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Option Window


Table 5-65 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

RS-EXC

1E-3

Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator


Section Signal Excessive BER condition.

1E-4
1E-5
RS-DEG

1E-6
1E-7

Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator


Section Signal Degrade condition.

1E-8
1E-9

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-230

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-383 Information Dialog Box

The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-384 BER Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-231

5.10 Assign PMON/RMON Settings


Use the following procedures to set the relevant configuration of PMON (except
Ethernet port) and RMON (Ethernet port), including threshold values.
The PMON/RMON Setting provides the following menus:
PMON Threshold Setting
Threshold setting of PMON (except Ether port).
PMON Other
Threshold setting of TCN level.
RMON Threshold Setting
Threshold setting of RMON (Ether port).
RMON Other
Add the VLAN Counter (VLAN Counter Report).

5.10.1 PMON Threshold Setting


PMON/RMON Threshold values can be set to the following objects:
MODEM: for a slot (Card) that does not configure Switch Group.
SW GRP: for slots (Cards) that configure a Switch Group.
APS GRP
STM1-A
16E1-A

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-232

PROVISIONING

5.10.1.1 MODEM / SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab


Procedure 5-80
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting

window appears.
3. Click the desired MODEM or SW GRP (for protected slots) tab to select, then
click the Modify tool button.
click a tab

Modify button

Figure 5-385 PMON Threshold Setting Window


RF - MODEM or RF - SW GRP option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-386 RF - MODEM Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-233

Table 5-66 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters


Parameter
RF BBE 15min

1day

RF ES

15min

1day

RF SES

15min

1day

RF SEP

15min

1day

RF UAS

15min

1day

RF OFS

15mintes

1day

NWD-118790-04E

Occur

Value
0 to 1611000

Recover

0 to 1611000

Occur

0 to 154656000

Recover

0 to 154656000

Occur

0 to 900

Recover

0 to 900

Occur

0 to 86400

Recover

0 to 86400

Occur

0 to 900

Recover

0 to 900

Occur

0 to 86400

Recover

0 to 86400

Occur

0 to 900

Recover

0 to 900

Occur

0 to 86400

Recover

0 to 86400

Occur

0 to 900

Recover

0 to 900

Occur

0 to 86400

Recover

0 to 86400

Occur

0 to 900

Recover

0 to 900

Occur

0 to 86400

Recover

0 to 86400

Description
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE for a
15-minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES for a
15-minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES for a
15-minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP for a
15-minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS for a
15-minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS for a
15-minute period.
Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-234

PROVISIONING

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-387 Information Dialog Box

The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-388 PMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-235

5.10.1.2 APS GRP (Slot No.) Tab


Procedure 5-81
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting

window appears.
3. Click the desired STM1-A or APS GRP tab, then Modify DMR RS or Modify RS

tool button.
Modify DMR RS button
Modify RS button

click a tab

Figure 5-389 PMON Threshold Setting Window


DMR - APS GRP or RS - APS GRP option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-236

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

DMR STM1 A / APS GRP

Figure 5-390 DMR Option Window (example: STM1 A)

Table 5-67 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter
DMR RS BBE

15min

1day

DMR RS ES

15min

1day

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Value

Description

Occur

0 to 1611000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


BBE condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 1611000

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


BBE for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 154656000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


BBE condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 154656000

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


BBE condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


ES condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


ES for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


ES condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


ES condition for a 1-Day period.

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-237

Table 5-67 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter
DMR RS SES

15min

1day

DMR RS SEP

15min

1day

DMR RS UAS

15min

1day

DMR RS OFS

15min

1day

NWD-118790-04E

Value

Description

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


SES condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


SES for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


SES condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


SES condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


SEP condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


SEP for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


SEP condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


SEP condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


UAS condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


UAS for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


UAS condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


UAS condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


OFS condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


OFS for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF


OFS condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF


OFS condition for a 1-Day period.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-238

PROVISIONING

RS STM1 A / APS GRP

Figure 5-391 RS Option Window (example: STM1 A)

Table 5-68 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
Parameter
RS BBE-RS

15min

1day

RS ES

15min

1day

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Value

Description

Occur

0 to 1611000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE


condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 1611000

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE


for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 154656000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE


condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 154656000

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE


condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES


condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES


for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES


condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES


condition for a 1-Day period.

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-239

Table 5-68 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - STM1-A /APS GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
Parameter
RS SES

15min

1day

RS SEP

15min

1day

RS UAS

15min

1day

RS OFS

15min

1day

Value

Description

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES


condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES


for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES


condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES


condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP


condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP


for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP


condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP


condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS


condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS


for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS


condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS


condition for a 1-Day period.

Occur

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS


condition for a 15-Minute period.

Recover

0 to 900

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS


for a 15-minute period.

Occur

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS


condition for a 1-Day period.

Recover

0 to 86400

Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS


condition for a 1-Day period.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-240

PROVISIONING

Figure 5-392 Information Dialog Box

The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-393 PMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-241

5.10.1.3 16E1-A (Slot No.) Tab


Procedure 5-82
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting

window appears.
3. Click the desired 16E1-A tab to select, then click the Modify tool button.
Modify button

click a tab

Figure 5-394 PMON Threshold Setting Window


E1CV 16E1-A option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-242

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-395 RF - E1CV 16E1-A Option Window

Table 5-69 PMON Threshold Setting (16E1-A) Parameters


Parameter
15min/1day

Value

Description

Occur

0 to 4294967295

Specifies the threshold value to detect an


alarm condition.

Recover

0 to 4294967295

Specifies the threshold value to clear the


alarmed condition.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-396 Information Dialog Box

The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-243

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-397 PMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-244

PROVISIONING

5.10.2 PMON Other


Procedure 5-83
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Other. The PMON Other window appears.
3. Click the target MODEM link:
link to option window

Figure 5-398 PMON Other Window


PMON Other Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-399 DMR - APS GRP Option Window


Table 5-70 PMON Other Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

RX Level TCN Threshold

99 to 30

Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN RX Level


alarm. [unit: dBm]

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-245

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-400 Information Dialog Box

The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-401 PMON Other Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-246

PROVISIONING

5.10.3 RMON Threshold Setting


Procedure 5-84
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Threshold Setting. The RMON Threshold Setting

window appears.
3. Click the Modify button:
Modify button

Figure 5-402 RMON Threshold Setting Window


RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-403 RMON Threshold Setting Option Window

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-247

Table 5-71 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters


Parameter
RX Drop Events

RX Undersize Pkts

RX Fragments

RX CRC Alignment
Errors

RX Oversize Pkts

TX Collisions

Value

Description

15 minutes

0 to 133929000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop


Event condition for a 15-minute period.

1 day

0 to 4294967294

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop


Events condition for a 1-day period.

15 minutes

0 to 133929000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX


Undersize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.

1 day

0 to 4294967294

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX


Undersize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.

15 minutes

0 to 133929000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX


Fragments condition for a 15-minute period.

1 day

0 to 4294967294

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX


Fragments condition for a 1-day period.

15 minutes

0 to 133929000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC


Alignment Error for a 15-minute period.

1 day

0 to 4294967294

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC


Alignment Error for a 1-day period.

15 minutes

0 to 133929000

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX


Oversize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.

1 day

0 to 4294967294

Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX


Oversize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.

15 minutes

0 to 133929000

Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX


collision for a 15-minute period.

1 day

0 to 4294967294

Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX


collision for a 1-day period.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-404 Information Dialog Box

The RMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-248

PROVISIONING

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-405 RMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-249

5.10.4 RMON Other


5.10.4.1 Add VLAN Counter
Procedure 5-85
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Other. The RMON Other window appears.
3. Click the VLAN counter No. on the VLAN Counter Select tab:
VLAN Counter numbers

Figure 5-406 RMON Threshold Setting Window


RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-407 VLAN Counter Select Option Window

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-250

PROVISIONING

Table 5-72 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters


Parameter

Value

Description

Item

(available card)

Select the target card to specify.

Port

(available port)

Select the target port to specify.

Enable

(radio button)

Clicking the radio button enables to count the frames that


pass through the selected VLAN.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-408 Information Dialog Box

The RMON Other window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-409 RMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-251

5.10.4.2 Delete VLAN Counter


Procedure 5-86
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Other. The RMON Other window appears.
3. Click the Delete VLAN Counter button:
Delete VLAN Counter

Figure 5-410 RMON Threshold Setting Window

The Delete VLAN Counter option window appears.


4. Select a VLAN Counter No. to be removed, then click the OK button:

Figure 5-411 VLAN Counter Select Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-252

PROVISIONING

5. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 5-412 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-413 Information Dialog Box

The RMON Other window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-414 RMON Threshold Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-253

5.11 AUX Setting


AUX Setting provides the following menus:
AUX Input Setting
AUX Output Setting

5.11.1 AUX Input Setting


Procedure 5-87
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand AUX Setting
to select AUX Input Setting. The AUX Input Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify button of the target Input tab:
Modify button

Figure 5-415 AUX Input Setting Window


AUX Input Setting option window appears.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-254

PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-416 AUX Input Setting Option Window


Table 5-73 AUX Input Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Name

(text field)

Enter the event name within one to 32 characters


long, which is to be displayed in the Event Log.

Condition

Alarm when Event On(Close)

Reports an alarm when Event On.

Alarm when Event Off(Open)

Reports an alarm when Event Off.

Status

Reports the status information instead of an alarm.

Event On (Close)

(text field)

Event Off (Open)

(text field)

Enter the event name to be displayed when the event


status changes.

Status Strings

X.733
Severity

Critical

Specifies an alarm severity level.

Major
Minor
Warning
Alarm Type

(see Table 5-74)

Specifies an alarm type name.

Probable Cause

(see Table 5-75)

Specifies a probable cause of the event.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-255

Table 5-74 AUX Input Setting Alarm Types


Parameter

Value

X.733 Alarm Type

communicationAlarm
qualityOfServiceAlarm
processingErrorAlarm
equipmentAlarm
environmentalAlarm
integrityViolationAlarm
operationalViolationAlarm
physicalViolationAlarm
securityViolationAlarm
timeDomainViolationAlarm

Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (1 of 6)


Parameter

Value

X.733 Probable Causes

aIS
callSetUpFailure
degradedSignal
farEndReceiverFailure
framingError
lossOfFrame
lossOfPointer
lossOfSignal
payloadTypeMismatch
transmissionError
remoteAlarmInterface
excessiveBER
pathTraceMismatch
unavailable
signalCableMismatch
lossOfMultiFrame
receiveFailure
transmitFailure
modulationFailure

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-256

PROVISIONING

Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (2 of 6)


Parameter

Value

X.733 Probable Causes


(continued)

demodulationFailure
broadcastChannelFailure
connectionEstablishmentError
invalidMessageReceived
localNodeTransmissionError
remoteNodeTransmissionError
routingFailure
backplaneFailure
dataSetProblem
equipmentIdentifierDuplication
externalIFDeviceProblem
lineCardProblem
multiplexerProblem
nEIdentifierDuplication
powerProblem
processorProblem
receiverFailure
replaceableUnitMissing
synchronizationSourceMismatch
terminalProblem
timingProblem
transmitterFailure
trunkCardProblem
replaceableUnitProblem
realTimeClockFailure
antennaFailure
batteryChargingFailure
diskFailure
FrequencyHoppingFailure
iODeviceError
lossOfSynchronisation
lossOfRedundancy
powerSupplyFailure
signalQualityEvaluationFailure

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-257

Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (3 of 6)


Parameter

Value

X.733 Probable Causes


(continued)

tranceiverFailure
protectionMechanismFailure
protectingResourceFailure
airCompressorFailure
airConditioningFailure
airDryerFailure
batteryDischarging
batteryFailure
commercialPowerFailure
coolingFanFailure
engineFailure
fireDetectorFailure
FuseFailure
generatorFailure
lowBatteryThreshold
pumpFailure
rectifierFailure
rectifierHighVoltage
rectifierLowFVoltage
ventilationsSystemFailure
enclosureDoorOpen
explosiveGas
fire
flood
highHumidity
highTemperature
highWind
iceBuildUp
intrusionDetection
lowFuel
lowHumidity
lowCablePressure
lowTemperature
lowWater

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-258

PROVISIONING

Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (4 of 6)


Parameter

Value

X.733 Probable Causes


(continued)

smoke
toxicGas
coolingSystemFailure
externalEquipmentFailure
externalPointFailure
storageCapacityProblem
memoryMismatch
corruptData
outOfCPUCycles
sfwrEnvironmentProblem
sfwrDownloadFailure
lossOfRealTimel
applicationSubsystemFailure
databaseInconsistency
fileError
outOfMemory
softwareError
timeoutExpired
underlayingResourceUnavailable
versionMismatch
bandwidthReduced
congestion
excessiveErrorRate
excessiveResponseTime
excessiveRetransmissionRate
reducedLoggingCapability
systemResourcesOverload
adapterError
applicationSubsystemFailure
bandwidthReducedX733
callEstablishmentError
communicationsProtocolError
communicationsSubsystemFailure
configurationOrCustomizationError

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-259

Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (5 of 6)


Parameter

Value

X.733 Probable Causes


(continued)

congestionX733
coruptData
corruptData
cpuCycleslimitExceeded
dataSetOrModemError
degradedSignalX733
dteDceInterfaceError
enclosureDoorOpenX733
equipmentVibration
fileErrorX733
direDetected
framingErrorX733
heatingVentCoolingSystemProblem
humidityUnacceptable
inputOutputDeviceError
inputDeviceError
lanError
leakDetected
localNodeTransmissionErrorX733
lossOfFrameX733
lossOfSignalX733
materialSupplyExhausted
multiplexerProblemX733
outOfMemoryX733
outputDeviceError
performanceDegraded
powerProblems
pressureUnacceptable
processorProblems
pumpFailureX733
queueSizeExceeded
receiveFailureX733
receiverFailureX733
remoteNodeTransmissionErrorX733

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-260

PROVISIONING

Table 5-75 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes (6 of 6)


Parameter

Value

X.733 Probable Causes


(continued)

resourceAtOrNearingCapacity
responseTimeExcessive
retransmissionRateExcessive
softwareErrorX733
softwareProgramAbnormallyTerminated
softwareProgramError
storageCapacityProblemX733
temperatureUnacceptable
thresholdCrossed
timingProblemX733
toxicLeakDetected
transmitFailureX733
transmitterFailure
underlyingResourceUnavailable
versionMismatchX733
authenticationFailure
breachOfConfidentiality
cableTamper
delayedInformation
denialOfService
duplicateInformation
informationMissing
informationModificationDetected
informationOutOfSequence
keyExpired
nonRepudiationFailure
outOfHoursActivity
outOfService
proceduralError
unauthorizedAccessAttempt
unexpectedInformation
other

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-261

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-417 Information Dialog Box

The AUX Input Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-418 AUX Input Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-262

PROVISIONING

5.11.2 AUX Output Setting


Procedure 5-88
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand AUX Setting
to select AUX Output Setting. The AUX Output Setting window appears.
3. Click the target Output number:
Output numbers

Figure 5-419 AUX Output Setting Window


AUX Output Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-420 AUX Output Setting Option Window


Table 5-76 AUX Output Setting Parameters
Parameter

Value

Description

Name

(text field)

Enter the event name within one to 32 characters long.

Condition

Event Off(Open)

Outputs a control signal when the Event is off.

Event On(Close)

Outputs a control signal when the Event is on.

Event On (Close)

(text field)

Enter the event name.

Event Off (Open)

(text field)

Status Strings

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
PROVISIONING

5-263

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-421 Information Dialog Box

The AUX Output Setting window updates the information.


7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-422 AUX Output Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
5-264/END

PROVISIONING

This page is intentionally left blank.

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS

6-1

6. ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS


CMF

Channel Mismatch Failure

CMI

Coded Mark Inversion

CNR

Carrier Noise Ratio

CONV

Converter

CORBA

Common Object Request Broker


Architecture

Alarm

CoS

Class of Service

ALS

Automatic Laser Shutdown

CPU

Central Processing Unit

AMR

Adaptive Modulation Radio

CR

Critical

ANT, Ant.

Antenna

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check

APS

Automatic Protection Switch

CS

Channel Separation

ATT

Attenuator

CTRL

Control

ATPC

Automatic Transmitter Power Control

CV

near and Code Violation

AU

Administrative Unit

CW

Carrier Wave

AUX

Auxiliary

DA

Destination Address

Ave

Average

DADE

Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer

BBE

Background Block Error

DB

Database

BER

Bit Error Ratio/Rate

DC

Direct Current

BPF

Band Pass Filter

DCN

Data Communication Network

BS

Base Station

DEG

Degraded

BSC

Base Station Controller

DEI

Drop Eligible Indicator

BTS

Base Transceiver Station

DEM

Demodulator

CAPEX

Capital Expenditure

Des (Dest)

Destination

CBS

Committed Burst Size

DI

Data-In

CCDP

Co-Channel Dual Polarization

D/I

Drop and Insert

CCM

Continuity Check Message

DL

Download

CEPT

Conference of European Postal &


Telecommunication Administration

DM

Delay Measurement

DMM

Delay Measurement Message

CIR

Committed Information Rate

DMR

Delay Measurement Reply

CKT, ckt

Circuit

DO

Data-Out

CLK

Clock

ACAP

Adjacent Channel Alternate


Polarization

ACCP

Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization

ACK

Acknowledgement

AGC

Automatic Gain Control

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

ALM

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
6-2

ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS

DSCP

Differentiated Services Code Pointer

FCS

Frame Check Sequence

DUP

Duplexer

FDB

Forwarding Database

DXC

Digital Cross Connect

FE

Fast Ethernet

E1

E-carrier level 1

FEC

Forward Error Correction

EBS

Express Burst Size

FEBBE

Far End Background Block Error

EIR

Excess Information Rate

FEES

Far End Errored Seconds

EMC

Electro Magnetic Compatibility

FESES

Far End Severely Errored Seconds

EML

Element Management Layer

FEUAS

Far End Unavailable Seconds

EMS

Element Management System

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array

EOW

C Order Wire

F/W

Firmware

EPS

ETH-Protection Switch

GbE, GBE

Gigabit Ethernet

EQL

Equalizer

3GPP

3rd Generation Partnership Project

ERP

ETH-Ring Protection Switch

GUI

Graphical User Interface

ES

Errored Seconds

Horizontal

ETH

Ethernet

HDB

High Density Bipolar

ETH-CC

ETH-Continuity Check function

HK

Housekeeping

ETH-LB

ETH-Loopback function

HP

HIgher order Path

ETH-LBM

ETH-Loopback Message

HYB

Hybrid

ETH-LBR

ETH-Loopback Reply

H/W

Hardware

ETH-LT

ETH-Link Trace function

ID

Identification

ETH-LTM

ETH-Link Trace Message

IDU

Indoor Unit

ETH-LTR

ETH-Link Trace Reply

IE

Internet Explorer

ETH-OAM

Ethernet Operations, Administration


and Maintenance

IEC

International Electrotechnical
Commission

ETH-OAM LB

ETH-OAM Loopback

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics


Engineers

ETH-OAM LT

ETH-OAM Link Trace


I/F

Interface

ETH-RDI

ETH-Remote Defect Indication


function

IF

Intermediate Frequency

IHG

iPASOLINK High Grade

IN

Input

INTFC

Interface

I/O

Input/Output

IP

Internet Protocol

ETSI

European Telecommunications
Standards Institute

EXC

Electrical Cross Connect

E-to-E

End-to-End

Fail

Failure

F/B

Front Back Ratio

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS

6-3

MD CPU

MODEM CPU

MDI

Medium Dependent Interface

MDIX

Medium Dependent Interface


Crossover

Layer 2 Switch

MD4

Message Digest Algorithm 4

LAN

Local Area Network

MD5

Message Digest Algorithm 5

LB

Loopback

MEG

Maintenance Entity Group

LBM

Loopback Message

MEM

Memory

LCD

Loss of Cell Delineation

MEP

MEG End Point

LCT

Local Craft Terminal

MIN

Minimum

LDPC

Low Density Party Check

MIP

Maintenance Intermediate Point

LED

Light Emitting Diode

MIX

Mixer

Lev.

Level

MJ

Major

LLF

Link Loss Forwarding

MMC

Multi Media Card

LM

Loss Measurement

MME

Mobility Management Entity

LMM

Loss Measurement Message

MMG

Mismerge

LNA

Low Noise Amplifier

MN

Minor

LO

Local Oscillator

MOD

Modulator

LOC

Loss of Continuity

MODEM

Modulator Demodulator

LOF

Loss of Frame

MON

Monitor

LOM

Loss of Multiframe

MPX

Multiplexer

LOP

Loss of Pointer

MS

Multiplex Section

LO REF

Local Reference Signal Loss

MSC

Mobile Switching Center

LOS

Loss of Signal

MSDU

MAC Service Data Unit

LP

Lower Order Path

MSP

Multiplex Section Protection

LPM

Link Performance Monitor

MTBF

Mean Time Between Failure

LT

Link Trace

MTPC

Manual Transmitter Power Control

LTI

Loss of Incoming Timing Input

MUX

Multiplexing Equipment

LTM

Link Trace Message

N/A

Not Applicable

MAC

Media Access Control

NBI

Northbound Interface

MAINT

Maintenance

NE

Network Element

MAX

Maximum

NML

Network Management Layer

Mdev

Mean Deviation

NMS

Network Management System

ITU

International Telecommunication
Union

ITU-R

Radio Communication Sector of ITU

ITU-T

Telecommunication Sector of ITU

L2SW

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
6-4

ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS

OAM

Operation Administration and


Maintenance

PNMSj

PASOLINK Network Management


System Java Version

OCR

Occur

PPI

PDH PHY Interface

Octs

Octets

ppm

parts per million

ODU

Outdoor Unit

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol

OFS

Out of Frame Second

PPS

Path Protection Switch

OMT

Orthomode Transducer

PQ

Priority Queuing

OPEX

Operational Expenditure

PRM

Parameter

OPP

Opposite

PROT

Protection

OPR

Operation

PS

Power Supply

OPT

Optical

RSL

Receive Signal Level

OSPF

Open Shortest Path First

PSC

Protection Switching Counts

OSS

Operation Support System

PSD

Protection Switching Duration

OUT

Output

PWR

Power

OW

Orderwire

QAM

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

PA

Power Amplifier

QoS

Quality of Service

PBR

Pressurizable Type B, flange profile


square Rectangular

QPSK

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

RCVR

Recover

PCP

Priority Code Point


REF

Reference

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy


REM

Remote

PDU

Protocol Data Unit


RDI

Remote Defect Indication

PGM

Program
RF

Radio Frequency

PHY

Physical
RFS

Radio Frequency Systems

PIR

Peak Information Rate


RL

Relay

PJE

Pointer Justification Event


RMON

Remote Network Monitoring

PJE-N

Pointer Justification Event Negative


Stuff

RNC

Radio Network Controller

RPL

Ring Protection Link

RS

Regenerator Section

RS-232

Recommended Standard 232

RSL

Received Signal Level

RST

Regenerator Section Termination

RSTP

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RX

Receiver

PJE-P

Pointer Justification Event Positive


Stuff

PKG

Package

Pkts

Packets

PLM

Payload Label Mismatch

PMC

PASOLINK Management Card

PMON

Performance Monitor

NWD-118790-04E

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS

6-5

SC

Service Channel

TIM

Trace Identifier Mismatch

SD

Space Diversity

TLV

Type Length Value

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

TM

Through Mode

SEG

Segment

TNC

Threaded Neill-Concelman

SEP

Severely Errored Period

ToS

Type of Service

SES

Severely Errored Seconds

TPID

Tag Protocol Identifier

SFP

Small Form Factor Pluggable

TQC

Total Quality Control

SGMI

Security Gateway Management


Interface

TTL

Time to Live

TU

Tributary Unit

SMS

Synchronous Multiplexing System


TX

Transmitter

SMU

Source Measure Unit


UAE

UAS Event

SNCP

Sub-network Connection Protection


UAS

Unavailable Seconds

SNMP

Simple Network Management


Protocol

UL

Upload

SP

Strict Priority

UNEQ

Unequipped

SPD

Speed

UNEXP

Unexpected

SRC

Source MAC Address

Unicast DMR

Unicast Delay Measurement Reply

STAT

Status

UNM

Unexpected MEP

STD

Standard

UNP

Unexpected Period

STM

Synchronous Transport Module

USB

Universal Serial Bus

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol

Vertical; Volt

SUB

Substitute

VC

Virtual Channel

SW

Switch

VLAN

Virtual LAN

S/W

Software

VP

Virtual Path

SWG

Switch Group

VPN

Virtual Private Network

SYNC

Synchronous

VSWR

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio

TCI

Tag Control Information

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

TCN

Threshold Crossing Notification

WG

Waveguide

TDM

Time Division Multiplex

WR

Warning

TDMoP

TDM over Packet

WRR

Weighted Round Robin

TEMP

Temperature; Temporary

WWW

World Wide Web

TERM

Terminal

WS

Wayside

TF

Transmit Fail

XCTRL

XPIC Control

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E

Submission Prohibited
NEC Internal Use Only
6-6/END

ABBREVIATIONS & ACRONYMS

X-DEM

XPIC Demodulator

XFP

10 (X) Gigabit Small Form Factor


Pluggable

XIF

XPIC IF

XPD

Cross Polarization Discrimination


Ratio

XPIC

Cross Polarization Interface


Canceller

XREF

XPIC Reference

iPASOLINK 1000: OPERATION

NWD-118790-04E